2009 Cadillac XLR/XLR-V Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC,
the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name XLR
are registered trademarks, and the name XLR-V
is a trademark of General Motors Corporation.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
Index
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25789008 A First Printing
©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Front Seats
The driver and passenger
seatback lumbar support
switches are located on the
outboard sides of the seats.
Power Seats
The power seat controls
are located on the outboard
side of the seat cushions.
• Use the power seat controls first to get the proper
position, then continue with the lumbar adjustment.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
• The top lumbar switch adjusts support to the middle
seatback and the bottom lumbar switch adjusts
support to the lower seatback.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
• Press the front of the switch to increase support and
the rear of the switch to decrease support.
Remember to readjust lumbar support as your seating
position changes.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated and Cooled Seats
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel
The buttons for the heated and cooled seats are located
on the climate control system.
( (Heated/Cooled Seat): Press to turn the feature on.
The button on the left controls the driver seat and the
button on the right controls the passenger seat. Each
press of the button will take you to a different setting.
The settings available in order are HI HEAT, LO HEAT,
OFF, HI COOL, LO COOL and OFF. You will be able to
feel the temperature change in a few minutes.
The feature will automatically turn off when the vehicle
page 3-36 for more information.
The vehicle is equipped with a memory package.
The controls are located on the driver seat, and are
used to program and recall memory settings for
the driver seating positions.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following steps to program each button:
between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in Park (P),
the exit position for the previously set driver can be
recalled by pressing the exit button.
1. Adjust the driver seat including the seatback
recliner, lumbar, both outside mirrors and the
steering wheel to a comfortable position.
When you use the keyless access transmitter to
unlock your vehicle, automatic seat and steering wheel
movement to the exit position may occur. The numbers
on the back of the transmitter, 1 and 2, corresponds to
the numbers on the memory buttons.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps are heard,
then release the button.
A second mirror, seating and steering wheel position
can be programmed by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2 (for driver 2). Each time a memory
button is pressed and released, a single beep will sound.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in P (Park), the memory positions will be
recalled after a brief delay. If the vehicle is not in P (Park),
three beeps will be heard and the memory position will
not be recalled.
Further programming for automatic seat and mirror
movement can be done using the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Power Reclining Seatbacks
When the engine is started, the seat, mirrors, and
steering wheel may automatically adjust to their
programmed positions.
Your seats have power
reclining seatbacks.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, power
mirror control buttons, memory buttons, or power
steering column control.
Two personalized exit positions can be set by first
recalling the driving position (by pressing 1 or 2), then
positioning the steering wheel and seat in the desired exit
positions and then pressing and holding the exit button
until two beeps are heard. The exit button is located
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the vertical power seat control located on the
outboard side of the seat to operate them.
{ CAUTION:
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things
not to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-45 for more information.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the
vehicle.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, for vehicles with
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the
extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions
than in the front seating positions.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{ CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the
seating surface against the
back of the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt, following
the instructions that came with that child restraint
and the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
the LATCH system, your child restraint may have lower
attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH system can
help hold the child restraint in place during driving or in
a crash. Some vehicles have lower and/or top tether
anchors designed to secure a child restraint with lower
attachments and/or a top tether.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Some child restraints with a top tether are designed to
be used whether the top tether is anchored or not.
Other child restraints require that the top tether
be anchored. A national or local law may require
that the top tether be anchored.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tether
anchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCH
system. If a national or local law requires that your
top tether be anchored, do not use a child restraint
in this vehicle because a top tether cannot be properly
anchored. You must use the safety belts to secure your
child restraint in this vehicle, unless a national or local
law requires that the top tether be anchored. Refer to
your child restraint instructions and instructions in this
manual for securing a child restraint using the vehicle’s
safety belts.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward position.
This vehicle has airbags. In addition, the vehicle
has a passenger sensing system which is designed
to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag under certain
page 3-45 for more information, including important
safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear-facing child restraints should not be installed in the
vehicle, even if the airbags are off.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-33
for how and where to install the child restraint using
LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers
locations.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-45 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ CAUTION:
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags.
impact airbags are intended to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted side impact
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above
the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold
level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is
intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is
struck.
The vehicle has seat position sensors which enables the
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver seat
and the right front passenger seat. Seat position sensors
provide information that is used to determine if the
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For seat-mounted side impact airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity
of the side impact.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the
airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
page 1-42 for more information.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are
airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks
closest to the door.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on
the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls
for those features.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
United States
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the
symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible in the rearview mirror
when the vehicle is started.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain conditions. The driver
airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing
system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints not be transported in the
vehicle, even if the airbags are off.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if:
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in
the right front passenger seat.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbags are active.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the
seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
{ CAUTION:
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbag(s) are off. See Passenger
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
The passenger sensing system may or may not
turn off the airbag(s) for a child in a child restraint
depending upon the child’s seating posture and
body build.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle and check with your
dealer/retailer.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag:
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag(s) off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
{ CAUTION:
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 8-15.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
the inside review mirror, front sensors, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or
with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed
for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing
pad or device, installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere with the
operation of the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper deployment of
the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-44 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{ CAUTION:
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt was not being used at the time of the crash.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, or if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle or while
page 3-44.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This key, located inside the
keyless access transmitter,
can be used for the glove
box and the trunk, if vehicle
page 2-14 for more
Your vehicle has a keyless access system with
for information on starting the vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle.
You may even have to damage your vehicle to get
in. Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
information.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance.
Keyless Access System
The Keyless Access System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
To remove the key, press
the button (A) near the
bottom of the keyless
access transmitter, and
pull the key out. Never
pull the key out without
pressing the button.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Keyless Access System Operation
The Keyless Access System transmitter functions
work up to 100 feet (30 m) away from the vehicle.
If there is a decrease in the keyless access transmitter
range, try this:
Keyless Unlocking
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. It may be necessary to stand
closer during rainy or snowy weather.
Press the door handle sensor to unlock and open the
doors if the keyless access transmitter is within range.
additional information.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Keyless Locking
The doors lock after several seconds if all doors are
closed and at least one keyless access transmitter
has been removed from the interior of the vehicle.
To customize whether the doors automatically lock when
information.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System
• Make sure that an electronic device such as a
cellular phone or lap top computer is not causing
interference.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keyless Trunk Opening
Pressing K also recalls the memory settings. See
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-3
for more information.
Press the trunk release sensor, located on the rear of
the trunk lid under the emblem, to open the trunk if the
keyless access transmitter is within range. See Trunk
on page 2-14 for additional information.
G (Trunk): Press and hold for about one second to
open the trunk. If the engine is running, the shift lever
must be in P (Park).
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Keyless Access
L (Panic): Press to sound the vehicle alarm. Press
any other button on the keyless access transmitter
to stop the vehicle alarm.
This vehicle comes with
two transmitters.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
Q (Lock): Press to lock
the doors. The indicator
light on the door flashes
once. If Q is pressed twice,
the doors lock, the light
flashes once and the horn
sounds once.
transmitter will have a number on top of it, ″1″ or ″2″.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1
will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled ″1″,
if enabled through the vehicle personalization. See
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-3
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only keyless access transmitters programmed to this
vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and programmed through
your dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed so
that lost or stolen transmitters no longer work. Each
vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock the driver door.
The indicator light on the door flashes twice.
Press K twice within five seconds to unlock both
doors. The interior lamps may come on.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle
when there is one recognized transmitter. For vehicles
sold in Canada, two recognized transmitters are
required to program a new transmitter.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Both the recognized and new transmitters must be
with you.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder located
on the lower rear fascia on the driver side of the
information on the key cylinder.
4. Open the trunk.
7. Place the new transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the
passenger side.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays
READY FOR FOB # 2, 3 or 4.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. A beep sounds once programming in complete.
The DIC will display READY FOR #3 or 4, or
MAX # FOBS LEARNED.
9. To program additional transmitters, repeat Step 7.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch if programming is
complete.
10. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to
complete the process.
Programming without a Recognized
Transmitter
This procedure requires three ten minutes cycles to
complete the programming process. United States
owners are permitted to program a new transmitter to
their vehicle when a recognized transmitter is not
available. The Canadian immobilizer standard requires
that Canadian owners see their dealer/retailer for
programming new transmitters when two recognized
transmitters are not available.
2. Place the new transmitter in the glove box transmitter
pocket with the buttons facing the passenger side.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder located
on the lower rear fascia on the driver side of the
information on the key cylinder.
1. The vehicle must be off.
4. Open the trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC message displays OFF-ACC TO LEARN.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Press Acc. on the ignition switch.
14. Press Acc. on the ignition switch if programming is
complete.
8. The DIC reads WAIT 10 MINUTES and counts
down to zero.
15. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to
complete the process.
9. The DIC displays OFF-ACC TO LEARN again.
10. Press Acc. on the ignition switch.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
11. Steps 8, 9 and 10 will be repeated two more times.
12. A beep sounds and the DIC reads READY FOR
FOB #1. All previously known transmitter
programming has been erased.
If the transmitter battery is weak, the DIC may display
NO FOB DETECTED when trying to start the vehicle.
To start the vehicle, place the transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the passenger
side. Then, with the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral),
13. A beep sounds once programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY FOR FOB #2.
To program additional transmitters, take
transmitter 1 out of the transmitter pocket
and place transmitter 2 in the pocket.
Up to four transmitters can be programmed.
The DIC then displays MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF FOBS LEARNED and exits the
programming mode.
press the brake pedal and / . Replace the transmitter
battery as soon as possible. Change the transmitter
battery if the DIC displays FOB BATTERY LOW.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch to complete the
process.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked it will not open. You
increase the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked.
So, wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you
leave it.
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the slot on the side of the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lock or unlock your vehicle from the outside, use the
keyless access transmitter and press the appropriate
lock or unlock button. You may also unlock and open the
door passively when you squeeze the door handle
sensor, as long as you have your transmitter with you.
Passive entry occurs when the door handle sensor
is pressed and the vehicle recognizes your keyless
access transmitter. When the passenger door is opened
first, the driver door will also become unlocked.
From the inside, use the power door lock buttons
located at the top of the door panel near the window.
information.
To open a door from the inside, press the button in front
of the door handle and push the door open.
If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitter
is lost, there are two ways to open the door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are inside the vehicle, use the door release
handle located on the floor next to each seat. Pull the
handle up to unlock and unlatch the door.
If you are outside the vehicle, there is a door release tab
in the trunk. The tab is located behind a panel on the
driver side of the trunk. Pull the handle to unlock and
information on opening the trunk during a loss of power.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
The power door lock switches are located on the doors.
There is an indicator light on the rear of the door
near the window.
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the shift
lever is moved into P (Park), both doors will unlock.
With the vehicle in P (Park) and the engine running,
door unlocking can be programmed through prompts
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
These prompts allow the driver to choose various
unlock settings. For programming information,
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed
when pressed, the light flashes twice. If the door is open
when pressed, the light flashes.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed
when pressed, the light comes on for a few seconds,
then turns off. If the door is open when pressed, the light
stays on.
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver door when both doors
are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter
inside the vehicle. When the driver door is opened,
a reminder chime will sound continuously. The vehicle
will remain locked only when at least one transmitter has
been removed from the vehicle and both doors are
Automatic Door Lock
Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out
of P (Park), all the doors will lock.
If someone needs to get out while the vehicle is not in
P (Park), have the person use the power door unlock
switch. When the door is closed again, the doors will lock
either when your foot is removed from the brake or the
vehicle speed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h).
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lock Release
Trunk
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Moving parts of the powered trunk lid can be
dangerous. You or others could be injured. Keep
yourself and others away from the trunk lid and its
mechanism while it is closing.
Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
This button is located to
the left of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
Press to open the trunk. To use, the vehicle must be in
P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the valet lockout switch
must be off.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Squeeze the trunk release sensor located on the
rear of the trunk lid.
You can also press G on the keyless access
transmitter to open the trunk. To disable this feature,
see “Valet Lockout Switch” under Theft-Deterrent
• Press G on the keyless access transmitter.
• Press the trunk close button on the underside of the
trunk lid.
You may passively enter the trunk when you squeeze the
trunk release sensor located on the rear of the trunk lid
under the emblem, as long as you have your transmitter
with you. The vehicle must be in PARK (P) and the valet
page 2-22.
To begin opening the trunk from the stopped position,
use any of the methods above, except pressing the trunk
close button.
To resume closing the power trunk lid, press the trunk
close button on the underside of the trunk lid.
To close the trunk, press G on the underside of the
trunk lid.
If the vehicle has lost battery power, you can still open
for more information.
To stop the trunk lid while it is closing, do one of the
following:
• Press the trunk lock release button located on the
instrument panel.
• Use the vehicle key.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
The key cylinder is located behind a cover on the lower
rear fascia on the driver side of the vehicle. Open the
door to access the key cylinder.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk near the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle and push up on the trunk
lid to release the latch from the inside.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the front of the switch to the first position to open
the window to the desired level. Lift the front of the
switch to the first position to close the window.
Power Windows
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that
allows power windows to be used once the ignition has
been turned off. For more information, see Retained
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Power Window Initialize
After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,
the express-up and index-up features will not function
until the system is initialized. Once power is restored,
do the following:
1. Close the door.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
2. Raise the window by lifting the front of the power
window switch.
3. Lift the switch for three seconds after the window is
closed. Release the switch. Then lift the switch
again for three seconds.
The power window
switches are located on
each door near the armrest.
The express-up system must be initialized to operate
the windows with the door open.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Window
{ CAUTION:
Down: Press the front of the window switch to
the second position and release to activate the
express-down feature. To stop the window, briefly lift
the switch.
If express override is activated, the window will not
reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
Up: Lift the front of the switch briefly to activate the
express-up feature. To stop the window, briefly press
the switch.
Express-Up Window
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
This feature is on both power windows. Press the up
arrow on the switch to the second position to activate the
express-up feature. If you want to stop the window as
it is raising, press the switch again.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window switch
all the way down in the express position. The window will
rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released, the express mode is re-activated.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when the
express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is
removed.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Window Indexing
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
This feature automatically lowers the window a small
amount when the door is opened. Then, when the door
is closed, the window will raise to its full up position.
Sun Visors
Theft-Deterrent System
Notice: Raising or lowering the retractable hardtop
with the visor or the visor vanity mirror cover up
may cause damage to the visor or mirror cover.
Always return the visor to the center mount or lower
the cover on the visor vanity mirror before raising
or lowering the retractable hardtop.
With this system, the
security light will flash
when the door is open and
locked with the power
door lock switch.
Swing down the visor to block out glare. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
If this light is on continuously while the engine is
running, your vehicle needs service.
Swing the visor down and lift the cover. The lamp will
automatically come on when the cover is opened.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming the System
Testing the Alarm
To arm the system:
To test the system:
1. Close the trunk lid.
• Press Q on the keyless access transmitter.
2. Lower the window on the driver door.
3. Manually arm the system.
4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
• Open the door. Lock the door with the power door
lock switch. The security light should flash. Remove
the keyless access transmitter from the interior of the
vehicle and close the door. The security light will stop
flashing and stay on. After 30 seconds, the light
should turn off.
5. Reach through the open window and manually pull
the release lever on the floor.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically lock
the doors and arm the system when you exit the
page 3-72.
6. Turn off the alarm by pressing K on the transmitter.
If the alarm is inoperative, check to see if the horn
works. If not, check the horn fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
alarm doesn’t go off, see your dealer/retailer.
Now, if a door or the trunk lid is opened without the
keyless access transmitter, the alarm will go off.
The horn will sound for two minutes, then it will go
off to save battery power. And, the vehicle will not
start without a keyless transmitter present.
Disarming the System
Always use the keyless access transmitter to unlock a
door either by pressing K on the transmitter or by
squeezing the door handle sensor while you have the
transmitter with you. Unlocking a door any other way will
set off the alarm. If the alarm sounds, press K on the
keyless access transmitter to disarm it.
The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the
driver door with the power door lock switch after
the doors are closed.
If the passenger stays in the vehicle when you leave with
the keyless access transmitter, have the passenger lock
the vehicle after the doors are closed. This way the alarm
will not arm, and the passenger will not set it off.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valet Lockout Switch
Immobilizer
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This switch is located
inside the glove box.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Press ON to disable the use of the trunk and convertible
top. The trunk cannot be opened except by using the key
if the valet lockout is on.
Press OFF to enable the use of the trunk and
convertible top.
Locking the glove box with the key will also help to
secure the vehicle.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not start and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another
keyless access transmitter. Or, place the transmitter in
the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS DETECTED”
additional information. Check the fuse. See Fuses and
start with the other transmitter, the vehicle needs service.
If the engine does start, the first transmitter may be faulty.
See your dealer/retailer or have a new keyless access
transmitter programmed to the vehicle.
Immobilizer Operation
The vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition is
turned off.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
is turned to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and a valid
transmitter is found in the vehicle.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light comes on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The immobilizer system can learn new or replacement
keyless access transmitters. Up to four keyless access
transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters, see “Matching
transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless Access
The system has one or more keyless access transmitters
that are matched to an immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless access
transmitter starts the vehicle. The vehicle may not
start if the keyless access transmitter is damaged.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
If the engine does not start and the security light comes
on, there may be a problem with the immobilizer system.
Press the START button again.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
The vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with push-button start.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the vehicle must be
running or in OFF/ACCESSORY mode and the regular
brake pedal must be applied.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
/ (START): Press while your foot is on the brake to
start the engine. The shifter must be in P (Park) or
N (Neutral) to start the engine and the keyless access
transmitter must be in the vehicle for the ignition to work.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the push-button start is not working, the vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to
the keyless access system. See DIC Warnings and
9 Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When this button is
pressed, the engine will turn off even if the shifter is not
in P (Park). If the shifter is in P (Park), the ignition
mode will change to Retained Accessory Power (RAP),
if all doors are closed. The ignition mode will change
to off, if a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory
If the shifter is not in P (Park), the ignition mode will
After being in ACCESSORY mode for about 20 minutes,
the vehicle will automatically enter RAP or will turn off,
depending on if the doors are opened or closed.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODE ON will
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This mode
allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield
wipers while the engine is off. Use accessory mode if you
must have the vehicle in motion while the engine is off, for
example, if the vehicle is being towed. If the door is open
while in accessory mode, the key in reminder chime will
sound continuously.
Power to the following accessories continues to work for
up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off or until
a door is opened:
• Audio System
• Audio Steering Wheel Controls
• Power Windows
For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close all the
doors and press the Acc. button to place the vehicle in
accessory mode. Press the button again to return to RAP.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the
button and the engine cranks automatically until
it starts. If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter is weak, the DIC displays KEY FOB
BATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.
Starting the Engine
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). To restart
the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral).
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert the
fob into the fob slot to enable engine starting.
See “No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings and
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when
the vehicle is stopped.
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the
vehicle for the ignition to work.
3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of
the Keyless Access System. Battery chargers should
not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.
4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to let
the cranking motor cool down.
To start the vehicle, do the following:
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below
0°F or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the
way to the floor while cranking for up to 15 seconds
maximum.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot on the brake pedal, press the
START button located on the instrument panel.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter in
the vehicle or if there is something causing
interference with it, the DIC will display NO FOBS
DETECTED. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-60 for more information.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by pressing the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check
with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
When the engine starts, let go of the accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same
thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Stopping the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) and press the Acc. button
located on the instrument panel. If the shifter is not in
P (Park), the engine shuts off and the vehicle goes into
the Accessory Mode. The DIC displays SHIFT TO PARK.
Once the shifter is moved to P (Park), the vehicle
turns off.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. Once cranking has been
initiated, the engine continues cranking for a few
seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start, cranking automatically stops after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running.
The DIC displays NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?, if the
keyless access transmitter is not detected inside the
vehicle when it is turned off.
more information.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or
others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and move the shift
page 2-33.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting
the engine.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular brakes
first and then press the shift lever button before you can
shift from P (Park) when the vehicle is running. If you
cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift
lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park)
as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into another gear.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for the vehicle.
If you need more power for passing and you are:
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice,
or sand without damaging the transmission, see If Your
page 5-20.
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect
with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving,
use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the
vehicle is being towed. Use N (Neutral) if the vehicle
must be moved with the engine off for short distances.
• Going about 35 mph (56km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It then selects and holds the transmission in lower gears
giving more noticeable upshifts for sportier vehicle
performance. Once you shift to the + (plus) or − (minus)
controls, the driver manual gear selection is activated.
A + (plus) symbol appears on the shift console above the
D (Drive) indicator and minus symbol appears below the
indicator. The Head-Up Display (HUD) also displays the
requested gear, though the actual upshift or downshift
could be delayed until the engine speed is correct for
that gear.
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
The Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature lets you manually
control the operation of the transmission.
To use this feature, move
the shift lever from the
D (Drive) position to the left
and into the driver shift
control gate.
The requested gear displays on the HUD until the next
time you upshift or downshift. The gear selected
and shown in the HUD is one of a number of gears
available. The vehicle does not upshift beyond the
chosen gear. The actual gear that the vehicle shifts
to depends on a combination of the driver-requested
gear range, vehicle speed and throttle position.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the vehicle. Always upshift
when necessary while using DSC.
The Sport Automatic Mode is selected by moving the
shift lever into the DSC area without shifting towards
the + (plus) or − (minus) symbols. While in the Sport
Automatic Mode, the transmission computer determines
when the vehicle is being driven in a competitive manner.
If you do not upshift as the engine approaches the red
line on the engine RPM (Revolutions Per Minute) gage,
the engine speed is controlled to limit the engine RPM.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Not all manual downshift requests will be allowed by
the transmission. To prevent excessive engine RPMs,
each gear has a maximum vehicle speed associated
with it. Any downshift request above this speed is
not allowed by the transmission.
DSC can be used while using cruise control, but
transmission shifting is different while the cruise control
is on. This is not a malfunction and is necessary to
let proper operation of the cruise control.
To return to fully automatic operation, move the shift
lever to the right and back into D (Drive).
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the current
gear flashes multiple times in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), indicating that the transmission has
not shifted gears.
When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and
icy conditions, you may want to shift into second gear.
A higher gear allows you to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces.
Some automatic downshifts can occur to maintain
minimum engine speed. This only happens if the vehicle
is left in too high of a gear for the vehicle’s speed.
For example, if you have been driving in sixth gear range
and come to a stop without manually downshifting, the
transmission automatically downshifts to first gear and
displays first gear on the HUD. As you begin to drive and
accelerate, the transmission remains in first gear until the
driver selects an upshift.
In higher gears, on the XLR only, an automatic downshift
occurs if you press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
This feature provides adequate acceleration capabilities
if you forget to downshift manually. Tap the shifter
forward and the vehicle upshifts.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you move out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the
engine is running, the parking brake should release.
If the parking brake has not been fully released and you
try to drive off with the parking brake on, the parking
brake indicator light will come on and stay on.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
If the parking brake does not fully release, you can
manually release the pedal.
near the driver door.
{ CAUTION:
Always shift to P (Park) before pulling the manual
release lever. If your hand or arm is in the way of
the pedal you could be hurt. The pedal springs
back quickly. Keep your hand and arm away when
you use the manual release lever.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down, then push the parking brake pedal down.
If the ignition is on, the parking brake indicator light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it
does not, you need to have the vehicle serviced.
Before releasing the manual parking brake, be sure to
put the vehicle in P (Park) and turn the ignition off.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Into Park
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
information.
Reach under the driver side of the instrument panel and
pull down on the manual release lever, which is located
behind the parking brake pedal. Pull down on the yellow
tab. If the parking brake does not release, you should
have the vehicle towed to your dealer/retailer for service.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the
driver seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously in this section.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
shift lever into P (Park), hold down the regular brake
pedal. See if you can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it
means that the shift lever was not fully locked into
P (Park).
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Shifting Out of Park
Shift lock release prevents shifting out of P (Park)
unless the vehicle is running or in Accessory mode and
the brake pedal is applied.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
more information.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Parking Over Things That Burn
2. Press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
{ CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may
block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you have to. If you
have left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Controls for the outside
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
power mirrors are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
This vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
page 2-42 for more information.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature
on or off.
1. Move } or | (selector switches) to the left or right
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
to choose the driver’s or passenger side mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from
behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and
the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
2. Press one of the four edges located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind can be seen.
Cleaning the Mirror
Keep the selector switch in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Manually fold the mirrors inward by pulling them toward
the vehicle. This feature may be useful when going
through a car wash or a confined space. Push the
mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal position,
before driving.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Convex Mirror
The driver’s side mirror adjusts for the glare of
headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the
on and off settings on the inside automatic dimming
rearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview
{ CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Park Assist Mirror
Vehicles with the memory package are capable of having
the passenger mirror tilt to a preselected position when
the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the driver
view the curb when parallel parking. If further adjustment
is needed after the mirror is tilted, the mirror switch may
be used. The mirror then returns to this new position
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver’s seat.
When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) and a
five-second delay has occurred, the passenger
side mirror returns to its original position.
Outside Heated Mirrors
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information
page 3-72 for more information.
Store the preferred mirror position by using the memory
option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
CAUTION: (Continued)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
For vehicles with the URPA system, it operates at speeds
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), and assists the driver with
parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse).
The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the
distance to an object up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the
vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground.
The display is located
between the driver and
passenger seatbacks.
{ CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system
does not replace driver vision. It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper, underneath
the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from
the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, a red light will be shown on the rear URPA
display when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse).
This occurs under the following conditions:
URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects
must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from the rear bumper.
This distance may be less during warmer or humid
weather.
• An object was hanging out of the trunk during the
last drive cycle. Once the object is removed,
URPA will return to normal operation.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur when the vehicle is closer
than 20 inches (0.5 m) from the object.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
If the system is still disabled after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
amber/amber/red
lights/continuous beep
20 in
0.5 m
amber/amber/red
lights flashing and
continuous beep
1 ft
0.3 m
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling that uses minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Press
the phone button and give a few simple voice commands
to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is
only available in the continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is KOBGTV06A.
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is 3521A-GTV06A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being
programmed.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
On vehicles with this feature there are three round Light
Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
This system provides a way to replace up to three remote
control transmitters used to activate devices such as
garage door openers, security systems, and home
automation devices.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
1. Press START or put the vehicle in accessory mode.
information.
Programming can only occur when the vehicle is
running or in accessory mode.
2. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
5. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
blinks rapidly until programming is complete.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
6. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-6, choosing
a different function button in Step 4 than what was
used for the garage door opener.
To program up to three devices:
1. Press START or put the vehicle in accessory mode.
information.
Programming can only occur when the vehicle is
running or in accessory mode.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the
dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch
settings on the motor head unit to program the
Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch
settings can also be used when the original hand
held transmitter is not available.
2. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of
dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you
do not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
The hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 3
now become the button strokes to be entered
into the Universal Home Remote in Step 5.
Be sure to enter the switch settings written
down in Step 3, in order from left to right, into
the Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 5.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
4. From inside the vehicle, first firmly press all
three buttons at the same time for about
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
three seconds. Release the buttons to put the
Universal Home Remote into programming mode.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights turn on.
7. Press and hold the button that will be used to control
the garage door until the garage door moves.
The indicator light above the selected button should
slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up
to 55 seconds.
8. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light blinks rapidly until
programming is complete.
9. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-9, choosing
a different button in Step 7 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
5. The indicator lights blink slowly. Enter each switch
setting from Step 3 into the vehicle’s Universal
Home Remote. You have two and one-half minutes
to complete Step 5. Now press one button on
the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting
as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light comes on while the
signal is being transmitted.
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
Operation can occur:
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
• If the vehicle is in accessory mode.
• If the vehicle is in running.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
• If the vehicle is in Retained Accessory Mode (RAP).
for more information.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
• Up to an additional 10 minutes after RAP finishes.
• Up to 10 minutes after any door is opened.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons are erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also an upright center console storage area
between the seatbacks. To open the storage area, press
and release the button near the top so it extends out.
Then, turn the button in either direction to unlatch the lid
and pull the console lid down. After closing the lid,
press the release button back in.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift the glovebox handle up to open it. Use the key to
lock and unlock the glovebox.
Floor Mats
Cupholders
The driver side floor mat is held in place by two snaps
and the passenger side is held in place by one.
To remove the floor mats, pull up on the rear of the
mat to disconnect from the snaps. To reinstall, line up
the openings in the floor mat over the snaps and push
down into place.
The cupholders are located under a lid in the front
console to the right of the shift lever. Press the left side
of the lid and it will open automatically.
Center Console Storage
Be sure that the driver side floor mat is properly placed
on the floor so that it does not block the movement
of the accelerator pedal.
There is a center console storage area located between
the seats. To open this storage area, push the latch
button and lift the lid.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the storage compartment, unsnap the lid.
To reinstall the lid, line up the opening in the lid over the
snap and push down into place.
Rear Storage Area
Convenience Net
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net
should not be used to store heavy loads.
Retractable Hardtop
The following procedures explain the proper operation
of the retractable hardtop. The retractable hardtop
will not operate if the valet lockout switch is on.
If the retractable hardtop is lowered or raised multiple
times, the engine should be running while doing so
to prevent drain on the vehicle’s battery.
There is a cargo divider located in the trunk to keep
cargo from getting in the way of the retractable hardtop.
The cargo divider must be in place for the top to move.
{ CAUTION:
To install the cargo divider, snap the bottom of the
divider onto the snaps (B) located on the floor of the
trunk. Then, pull the divider up and place the pins
on each side of the divider into the notches (A) on either
side of the trunk.
When the retractable hardtop is opened or closed,
people can be injured by the parts that move: the
hardtop and its mechanism, the trunk lid, and the
side windows. Keep people away from these parts
when you are lowering or raising the top.
There is also a storage compartment located in the
trunk on the passenger side.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Push and hold the
bottom of this button
located on the console
behind the shifter lever.
Lowering the Retractable Hardtop
Notice: Leaving the retractable hardtop down and
exposing the interior of the vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close the
retractable hardtop if leaving the vehicle outdoors.
1. Park on a level surface and shift the transmission
into P (Park).
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in Acc.
3. Lower both sun visors.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle
is in motion can cause damage to the top or top
mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park) to
lower or raise the top.
The windows will automatically lower and the top will
automatically lower into the storage area. A chime
will sound when the top has lowered completely.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it.
If the radio is on, the sound may be muted briefly while
the retractable top is lowered. This occurs because
a new audio system equalization is being loaded.
4. Make sure that nothing or no one is on or around
the top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in
place with nothing on top or in front of the cargo
for more information. Also, make sure the valet
lockout switch is off.
Under certain conditions, the Driver Information Center
(DIC) may display messages regarding the retractable
for more information.
If the retractable hardtop does not operate, and there
are no messages displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), then perform the “Power Window Initialize”
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Push and hold the top
of this button located
behind the shift lever.
Raising the Retractable Hardtop
1. Park on a level surface. Shift the transmission into
P (Park).
2. The vehicle’s engine must be on or in Acc.
3. Lower both sun visors.
Notice: Raising or lowering the top while the vehicle
is in motion can cause damage to the top or top
mechanism. Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park) to
lower or raise the top.
4. Make sure nothing or no one is on or around the
top. Make sure the trunk cargo cover is in place
with no cargo on top of or in front of the cargo
more information. Also, be sure the valet lockout
switch is off.
The windows will automatically lower and the top will
raise. A chime will sound when the top has raised
completely.
After the top is fully raised, release the retractable
hardtop button.
If the radio is on, you may notice a brief mute in sound.
This is normal and due to a new audio system
equalization being loaded for the vehicle with the top
raised.
Under certain conditions, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) may display messages regarding the
retractable hardtop. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-60 for more information.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the retractable hardtop does not operate, and there
are no messages displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), then perform the “Power Window Initialize”
Notice: Pressing the retractable hardtop button
when the hydraulic pump valve is open could
damage the pump. Always close the hydraulic pump
valve after the retractable hardtop has been closed
manually.
Manually Raising the Retractable Hardtop
If the vehicle has a power loss, such as a dead
battery, you can still raise the top manually by doing the
following:
1. Lower both sun visors and open both doors.
information.
3. Raise the trunk by hand.
4. Find the hydraulic pump
under the carpet on
the rear driver side
of the trunk. Open the
valve by turning it
counterclockwise with
your hand until it stops.
5. Pull both sides of the rear tonneau over-center link
down to unlock the linkage.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Move the rear tonneau rearward and up to the stored
position. Pull from the center of the tonneau to keep
pressure even. The rubber bumper on each corner
will fit against the underside of the trunk decklid.
7. Push both sides of the rear tonneau over-center link
up until they stop to lock the linkage.
8. Close the hydraulic pump valve by turning it
clockwise with your hand until it stops.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove the upright center storage compartment.
Use the wrench to remove the four screws holding
the storage area in place.
10. Reach behind the square hole and push the front
tonneau over-center link up. The front tonneau
should pull up easily. If it does not, push the
over-center link up more.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Insert the wrench into the bolt beneath the plug
location. Turn the wrench about one-quarter turn
counterclockwise until it stops while gently pulling up
on the center of the top to release it.
11. Manually move the front tonneau to the open
position. Once the front tonneau is open, fold
the side wings by gently pressing them in. Do not
force the wings. If they are hard to move, make sure
the front tonneau is open all the way.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Hold the top in the front and side and lift the top out
of the stored position.
15. Hold the top in the front and the rear and lift the top
until it is almost closed. Be careful not to pinch your
fingers between the rear of the top and the rear
window.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. Place your hands on the top and guide the top into
the closed position.
17. While sitting in the driver seat, pull down on the
rear of the top.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18. While holding the rear
of the top down, insert
the wrench into the
bolt in the plug opening
in the headliner.
Turn the wrench
counterclockwise
until it stops to fully
open the latch
jaws around the pins.
19. Pull down on the roof with the latch turned open.
Turn the wrench clockwise until it stops to lock the
top into position. Push up on the roof. If it moves
away from the windshield header it is not latched
and you will need to repeat the previous steps.
20. From outside the vehicle, push down on both rear
corners of the top to make sure it is completely
locked into place.
21. From inside the vehicle, reach behind the headrest
and gently pull the wings out a small amount.
Then, fold the front tonneau to the closed position.
22. Manually close the trunk.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-6.
on page 2-28.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls/Interior
page 3-57.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
The hazard warning flashers warns others that you have
a problem. The button is located near the center of
the instrument panel.
The power tilt and
telescope wheel control is
located on the outboard
side of the steering
column.
| : Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what mode
the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.
Horn
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
and the steering wheel tilts up. Push the control
down and the steering wheel goes down.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves
toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control rearward
and the steering wheel moves toward the rear of the
vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC Vehicle
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I : Cruise Control
Heated Steering Wheel
P : Exterior Lamps Control
page 3-8.
For vehicles with a heated steering wheel, the button for
this feature is located on the steering wheel.
( : Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off.
A light on the button displays when the feature is
turned on.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start
heating.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Move the multifunction lever all the way up or down to
signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane
change is complete.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
# : Fog Lamps
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use.
When you do, the following will occur:
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 6-83.
• If the low-beam headlamps are on, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as
you hold the lever there. Release the lever to turn
them off.
Turn Signal on Chime
A chime will remind you if the turn signal is left on for
more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km) of driving.
• If the headlamps are on high-beam, they will switch
to low-beam. To return to high beam, push the lever
away from you.
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it
back on.
Windshield Wipers
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push the turn signal lever all the way forward to
change the headlamps from low beam to high beam.
When the high beams are on, this light $ appears on
the instrument panel cluster.
Pull the lever rearward to change the headlamps back
to low beam.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the lever to the following positions:
Rainsense™ Wipers
1 (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
& (Delay): Use to set a delay between wipes.
With Rainsense wipers, there is a moisture sensor
mounted on the interior side of the windshield below
the rearview mirror, and it automatically operates the
wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up
on the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the
windshield depending on driving conditions and the
sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will
occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more
frequently. The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay
mode as well as a continuous low or high speed as
needed. If the system is left on for long periods of time,
occasional wipes may occur without any moisture on
the windshield. This is normal and indicates that the
Rainsense system is activated.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use for a delayed wiping
cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust band down for
a longer delay or up for a shorter delay. The wiper
speed can only be manually adjusted when the lever
is in this position.
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move all the way down to mist and release
for a single wiping cycle. The windshield wipers will
stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer for
more wipes.
The Rainsense system is also sensitive to vibration.
The system may activate if something hits the
windshield or if the vehicle hits a bump.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this occurs,
a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the motor cools.
Clear all ice and snow from the windshield wiper blades
before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen them or warm the windshield
before turning the wipers on. If they become worn or
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
The Rainsense system can be activated by moving the
wiper lever up to the delay position and turning the
delay adjust band to one of the five sensitivity levels.
The bottom delay adjust position is the lowest sensitivity
setting, level one. This allows more rain or snow to
collect on the windshield between wipes. Turning the
delay adjust band away from you to the higher sensitivity
levels allows less rain or snow to collect on the
windshield between wipes.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The top position is the highest sensitivity setting, level
five. A single wipe will occur each time the delay adjust
band is turned to a higher sensitivity level to indicate
that the sensitivity level has been increased.
Windshield Washer
K (Washer Fluid): The lever on the right side of the
steering column also controls the windshield washer.
There is a button at the end of the lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, press the button and
hold it. The washer will spray until you release the
button. The wipers will continue to clear the window
for about six seconds after the button is released and
then stop or return to your preset speed.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense function. The Rainsense
system can be overridden at any time by manually
changing the wiper control to low or high speed.
When Rainsense is active, the headlamps will turn
on automatically. If it is dark, they will remain on.
See “Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Exterior
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on
the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the
moisture sensor to malfunction.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is
low, the message LOW WASHER FLUID will appear
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It
will take 60 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this
message to turn off. For information on the correct
washer fluid mixture to use, see Windshield Washer
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the traction control system and it
begins to limit wheel spin while cruise control is on,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow cruise control to be safely
used again, it can be turned back on.
Headlamp Washer
The headlamps washer only functions every fourth time
the washer button is pressed and if the headlamps
are on.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
{ CAUTION:
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
R (On): Turns the system on.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Makes the vehicle accelerate
or resume to a previously set speed.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
T (Set): Press this button at the end of the lever to
set the speed.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and
the brake is applied, the cruise control will turn off.
It does not need to be reset
{ CAUTION:
Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, move the cruise control switch briefly from R to S .
The vehicle will go back up to the chosen speed and
stay there.
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
If the switch is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until the switch is released or
the brake is applied. Do not hold the switch at
resume/accelerate, unless you want the vehicle to
go faster.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
This light J appears on the instrument panel cluster
when the cruise control is engaged.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle
slows down to the cruise control speed set earlier.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press T at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep your vehicle’s speed down.
When the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off.
• Move the cruise switch from R to S . Hold it there
until the desired speed is reached, and then
release the switch. To increase the vehicle speed
in small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/accelerate. Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Move the cruise control switch to 9
• Press and hold the set button until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.
Erasing Speed Memory
• To slow down in small amounts, briefly press the
set button. Each time this is done, the vehicle
goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Adaptive Cruise Control
If the vehicle has this feature, be sure to read this entire
section before using it.
Adaptive Cruise Control is an enhancement to traditional
cruise control and is not a safety system. It allows
you to keep cruise control engaged in moderate traffic
conditions without it having to be constantly reset.
Adaptive Cruise Control uses radar to detect a vehicle
directly ahead in your path, within a distance of
328 ft (100 m), and operates at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h). When it is engaged by the driver,
the system can apply limited braking or acceleration
of the vehicle, automatically, to maintain a selected
following distance to the vehicle ahead. The vehicle’s
braking during Adaptive Cruise Control is comparable to
a person applying moderate pressure to the vehicle’s
brake pedal. To disengage Adaptive Cruise Control,
apply the brake. If no vehicle is in your path, your
vehicle will react like traditional cruise control.
The system operates on a radio frequency subject to
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
• Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to
slow your vehicle enough to avoid a crash
when you are driving in conditions where
vehicles may suddenly slow or stop ahead of
you, enter your lane, or cross your vehicle’s
path. If you are driving in these conditions, do
not use Adaptive Cruise Control. The warning
beep and alert symbol may indicate that
you are driving in conditions where Adaptive
Cruise Control should not be used.
See “Alerting the Driver” in this section.
• On slippery roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause needless wheel spinning, and you
could lose control. Do not use cruise control
on slippery roads.
Adaptive Cruise Control will not apply hard braking
or bring the vehicle to a complete stop. It will not
respond to stopped vehicles, pedestrians or
animals. When you are approaching a vehicle or
object, Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving and you should be ready to take action
and apply the brakes. For more information,
{ CAUTION:
• When weather limits visibility, such as when in
fog, rain, or snow conditions, Adaptive Cruise
Control performance is limited. There may not
be enough distance to adapt to the changing
traffic conditions. Do not use cruise control
when visibility is low.
• On winding roads, Adaptive Cruise Control
may not detect a vehicle ahead. You could
crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Do not use
Adaptive Cruise Control on winding roads.
CAUTION: (Continued)
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise controls are
located on the end of the
multifunction lever.
Engaging Adaptive Cruise Control With
the Set Button
The Adaptive Cruise
controls are located on
the outboard side of
the steering wheel.
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your Adaptive Cruise Control switch
on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not want
to. You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the Adaptive Cruise Control switch off until
you want to use cruise control.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
R (On): Turns the system on.
S (Resume/Increase): Push the switch to this symbol
to make the vehicle resume the speed set previously or
to increase the set speed when Adaptive Cruise
Control is already active.
{ CAUTION:
If you operate Adaptive Cruise Control without
your Head-up Display (HUD) properly adjusted,
your Adaptive Cruise Control settings may not be
visible. You could forget your settings and be
startled by Adaptive Cruise Control response and
even lose control. Keep your HUD on and properly
adjusted when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
T (Set/Decrease): Press to set the speed or to
decrease the set speed when Adaptive Cruise Control is
already active.
[ (Cancel): Press this button located on the steering
wheel to cancel Adaptive cruise control.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The set speed is selected by the driver. This is the
speed you will travel if there is no vehicle detected in
your path.
This symbol appears on
the Head-Up Display
(HUD) to indicate that
Adaptive Cruise Control
is active.
To set Adaptive Cruise Control, do the following:
1. Make sure the Head-Up Display (HUD) is on and
properly adjusted. You cannot engage Adaptive
Cruise Control unless the HUD is on. See Head-Up
information.
2. Move the switch to the on position.
3. Get up to the desired speed.
Make sure the set speed is visible on the HUD so you
know the speed your vehicle will accelerate to if a
vehicle is not detected in your path. Keep in mind
speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather
conditions when adjusting your set speed.
4. Press T at the end of the lever and release
the button.
5. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Once Adaptive Cruise Control is set, it might
immediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle
ahead that is too close or moving slower than your
vehicle.
If the vehicle is in Adaptive Cruise Control when the
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin,
the Adaptive Cruise Control automatically disengages.
conditions allow you to safely use it again, the Adaptive
Cruise Control can be turned back on.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Set Speed While Using Adaptive
Cruise Control
Decreasing Set Speed While Using
Adaptive Cruise Control
There are two ways to increase the set speed:
Press T on the end of the lever until the lower
desired speed is reached, then release the button.
• Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed.
Press T at the end of the lever, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will now cruise at the higher speed.
To slow down in small amounts, briefly press T .
Each this is done, the set speed will be 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
• Move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch from
Resuming a Set Speed
R to S . Hold it there until the desired set speed
is displayed in the HUD, then release the switch.
To increase the set speed in small amounts, move
the switch briefly to resume/increase. Each time
this is done, the vehicle set speed increases
by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If the brakes are applied while the Adaptive Cruise
Control is at a set speed, this disengages the Adaptive
Cruise Control. But it does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, move the Adaptive Cruise Control switch
briefly from R to S . Adaptive Cruise Control will be
Your vehicle will not reach the set speed until the
system determines there is no vehicle in front of you.
At that point, your vehicle speed will increase to the
set speed.
engaged with the speed selected previously.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
further back you will follow. Consider traffic and
weather conditions when selecting the follow distance.
The range of selectable distances may not be
appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. If you
prefer to travel at a following distance farther than
Adaptive Cruise Control allows, disengage the system
and drive manually.
Selecting the Follow Distance (GAP)
When the system detects a slower moving vehicle, it will
adjust your vehicle’s speed and maintain the following
distance (gap) selected.
Use the GAP button on
the steering wheel to
adjust the follow distance
between your vehicle
and other vehicles.
Press the top of the button to increase the distance or
the bottom of the button to decrease the distance.
The first button press shows the current follow distance
setting on the HUD. The current following distance
setting is maintained until it is changed.
There are six follow distances to choose from.
The follow distance selection ranges from near to far
(1 second to 2 seconds follow time). The distance
maintained for a selected follow distance varies based
on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed the
A graphic on the HUD indicates the selected following
distance. This picture shows a maximum follow distance.
The vehicles will move closer together as you select a
smaller following distance.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alerting the Driver
This symbol flashes on the
HUD and a warning beep
sounds when driver
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control has only limited braking
ability to slow your vehicle. In some cases,
Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time to slow
your vehicle enough to avoid a collision. Be ready
to take action and apply the brakes yourself.
action is required.
Driver action is required when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control cannot apply sufficient
braking because you are approaching a vehicle
too rapidly.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
This symbol only appears
on the HUD when a
vehicle ahead is detected
in your path.
• The vehicle speed drops below about
20 mph (32 km/h).
• A temporary condition prohibits Adaptive Cruise
Control from operating. See DIC Warnings and
information.
If this symbol does not appear, or disappears briefly,
Adaptive Cruise Control will not respond to vehicles you
may see ahead.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When the Adaptive Cruise Control radar is blocked
by snow, ice, or dirt, it may not detect a vehicle
ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control may not have time
to slow your vehicle enough to avoid a collision.
Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when the
radar is blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. Keep your
radar clean. See “Cleaning the System” later in
this section.
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. You could crash into an
object ahead of you. Do not use Adaptive Cruise
Control when approaching stationary or
slow-moving vehicles or other objects.
Adaptive Cruise Control automatically slows the vehicle
down when approaching a slower moving vehicle.
It then adjusts your speed to follow the vehicle in front
at the selected following distance. Your speed increases
or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you, but
will not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited
braking, if necessary. When braking is active, the brake
lights come on. It may feel or sound different than if
you were applying the brakes yourself. This is normal.
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may not detect and react
to stationary or slow-moving vehicles or other
objects ahead of you. Your vehicle may accelerate
toward objects, such as a stopped vehicle that
suddenly appears after the lead vehicle changes
lanes. Your complete attention is always required
while driving and you should be ready to take
action and apply the brakes.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Speed Deactivation
Curves in the Road
If your speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h) while
following a vehicle ahead, Adaptive Cruise Control
begins to disengage. The driver alert symbol on
the HUD flashes and the warning beep sounds.
The driver must take action since Adaptive Cruise
Control will not slow the vehicle to a stop.
{ CAUTION:
Due to Adaptive Cruise Control limitations in
curves, it may respond to a vehicle in another
lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in
your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of
you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra
attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes
if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while
driving in curves.
Passing a Vehicle
To increase speed to pass a vehicle, use the accelerator
pedal. While your foot is on the accelerator pedal, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes. Once
you pass the vehicle and remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal, Adaptive Cruise Control returns
to normal operation and the brakes can be applied,
if needed.
Adaptive Cruise Control might operate differently in a
sharp curve. It might reduce your speed if the curve is
too sharp. The TIGHT CURVE message will also display
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
If you rest your foot on the accelerator pedal, the
system will not automatically apply the brakes.
You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.
Do not rest your foot on the accelerator pedal
when using Adaptive Cruise Control.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, Adaptive
Cruise Control could lose track of the vehicle in your
lane and accelerate your vehicle. When this happens,
the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear on the HUD.
Adaptive Cruise Control might detect a vehicle that is
not in your lane and apply the brakes.
Adaptive Cruise Control might occasionally provide
a driver alert and/or braking that you consider
unnecessary. It could respond to signs, guardrails,
and other stationary objects when entering or exiting
a curve. This is normal operation. Your vehicle does not
need service.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Exit Ramps
Using Adaptive Cruise Controls on Hills
{ CAUTION:
Adaptive Cruise Control may lose track of the
vehicle ahead and accelerate up to your set speed
while entering or on highway exit ramps. You could
be startled by this acceleration and even lose
control of the vehicle. Disengage Adaptive Cruise
Control before entering a highway exit ramp. Do not
use Adaptive Cruise Control while entering or on
exit ramps.
How well Adaptive Cruise Control works on hills
depends on your speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions,
and the steepness of the hills. It might not detect a
vehicle in your lane while driving on hills. While going
up steep hills, you might want to use the accelerator
pedal to maintain your vehicle speed. While going
downhill, you might have to brake to keep your vehicle
speed down. Applying the brake disengages the
system. You may choose not to use Adaptive Cruise
Control on steep hills.
Other Vehicle Lane Changes
Disengaging Adaptive Cruise Control
Apply the brake pedal or move the Adaptive Cruise
Control switch to off, to disengage the system. Adaptive
Cruise Control information does not appear on the
HUD while the system is not engaged.
If another vehicle enters the same lane as you, Adaptive
Cruise Control will not detect the vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. Be ready to take action and apply
the brakes yourself.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Set Speed Memory
The set speed memory is erased when the Adaptive
Cruise Control switch or the ignition is turned off.
Other Messages
There are three messages that may appear on the DIC.
They are SERVICE RADAR CRUISE, CRUISE NOT
READY and CLEAN RADAR CRUISE. These messages
will only appear to indicate a problem with the Adaptive
Cruise Control. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-60 for more information.
Clean the surface with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl
alcohol and water on a dampened cloth. After cleaning
the fascia lens, try to engage Adaptive Cruise Control.
If this does not fix the problem, you may have to remove
the fascia lens and clean the inside of the fascia lens
and radar lens.
You may also see CRUISE SPEED LIMITED displayed
for more information.
Cleaning the System
The radar can become blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.
If so, you may need to turn off the engine and clean the
lens, located on the driver side of the front fascia.
To clean the inside of the fascia lens and radar lens,
insert a tool into one of the small slots on the inboard
side of the lens and pop the lens out. Clean the surface
with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water
on a dampened cloth. After cleaning the lens, set the
lens back in place and press until it snaps in place.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
Exterior Lamps
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior
lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode will also
reset when your vehicle is turned off and then back
on again when the control is left in the AUTO position.
; (Parking Lamp): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band to operate
the exterior lamps.
There are four positions:
The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine
off and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
O (Off): Turns off all lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Sets the exterior lamps to
automatic mode. AUTO mode will turn the exterior
lamps on and off depending on how much light
is available outside the vehicle. Turning the band to
AUTO mode also enables the Adaptive Forward Lighting
page 3-28.
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DRL system comes on when the following
conditions are met:
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately six seconds and the multifunction lever is
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is in the off position.
• The transmission is not in P (Park).
When the exterior lamp control has been turned off or is
in the parking lamp position and the wiper control is
on delay, low speed or high speed, the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps are
on. No other exterior lamps such as the parking
lamps, taillamps, etc. are on when the DRL are used.
The instrument panel is not be lit up either.
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps turn off and normal low-beam headlamps turn on.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off.
When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps
go off, and the front turn signal lamps take over. If the
vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if
it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster might not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness knob is in the full bright
for more information.
Headlamps on Reminder
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message displays
on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). This message
informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is
page 3-60.
the AFS. To enable AFS, set the exterior lamp switch
on the multifunction lever to the AUTO position.
Moving the switch out of the AUTO position will
page 3-26.
Turn the exterior lamp control off a second time,
or turn on the headlamps to turn off the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message in the DIC. If the parking
lamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead, the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message continues to
display.
Fog Lamps
Use fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamps control is located on the multifunction
lever next to the exterior lamp control.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
# (Fog Lamps): Turn the band to turn the fog lamps on.
The fog lamp light appears on the instrument panel
cluster to indicate that the fog lamps and the parking
lamps are on.
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
The Adaptive Forward Lighting System (AFS) swivels
the headlamps horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. AFS will operate when the
vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). AFS will
not operate when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
AFS is not immediately operable after starting the
vehicle; driving a short distance is required to calibrate
If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lamps
will turn off. They will turn on again when you switch
to low-beam headlamps.
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.
The fog lamps will turn off when the ignition is turned off.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps
to be on along with the fog lamps.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Twilight Sentinel®
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when
it is dark outside. After starting the vehicle, turn the
exterior lamp control band to off, then release it.
The lamps will remain off until you turn the control
band to off again.
This feature can turn the lamps on and off for you.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, the
lamps will remain on until:
With Twilight Sentinel® you will see the following happen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps that
come on with headlamps will also come on.
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from OFF to the
parking lamp position, or
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will
go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL) will
come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is in the
AUTO position.
• the delay time selected has elapsed.
select the delay time. You can also select no delay time.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if
it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the
instrument panel brightness control is in full bright
for more information.
If the ignition is turned off with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off as
soon as the switch is turned off.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure not to have the brightness turned all the way
down with the lamps on during the day. The DIC
may not be visible.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been
left on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as
the ignition is turned off or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. This protects against draining the
battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps
or parking lamps on. The battery saver does not work
if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition switch is
turned to off.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the trunk lid is opened, the interior
lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.
Press the interior lamp button on the right side of the
instrument panel, to turn the courtesy lamps on or off.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lamp
control to turn the lamps back on.
Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
for about 20 seconds when the engine is turned off.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The button for this feature is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
the courtesy lamps on and off.
+! - (Brightness): Press to change the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
Reading Lamps
Press the DIMMER button until PANEL DIMMING
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Then
use the brightness button to adjust the instrument panel
brightness. Press the top or bottom of the button to
brighten or dim the lights. See Head-Up Display (HUD)
on page 3-31 for more information.
The inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When
the doors are closed, each lamp can be turned on
individually by pressing the button for that lamp.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Head-Up Display (HUD) allows you to see some of
the driver information that appears on the instrument
panel cluster.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from being drained, in case the underhood lamp, vanity
mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps, console,
or glove box lamps are accidentally left on, or something
is left plugged into the accessory power outlet or
cigarette lighter. If any of the accessory lamps are
left on, they will automatically time-out after about
10 minutes. To reset the battery protection, all of the
above lamps must be turned off or the ignition must be
in the ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward
the front of the vehicle. To change from English to metric
The HUD consists of the following information:
• Speedometer
• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
• Tap-Up/Tap-Down Transmission Feature
• Check Gages Message
Head-Up Display (HUD)
{ CAUTION:
• Adaptive Cruise Control Features and Indicators
• Radio Features
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in your
field of view, it may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is dark outside.
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed
low in your field of view.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel.
+! - (Brightness): Use to adjust the brightness of the
HUD and the instrument panel cluster.
Continue to scan the displays, controls and driving
environment just as you would in a vehicle without HUD.
Check the instrument panel cluster, to be sure you do
not miss something important, such as a warning
light. Under important warning conditions, the CHECK
GAGES message will display in the HUD. View the
Driver Information Center (DIC) for more information.
DIMMER: Use to select the HUD or the instrument
panel cluster to adjust the brightness.
HUD: Use to adjust the vertical position of the HUD
display.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the HUD so you can see it properly, do the
following:
shine back into the HUD. When this occurs, the display
device within the HUD will be temporarily illuminated.
The event will end when the vehicle’s angle to the
sun changes.
1. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position.
If you change the seat position later, you may
have to re-adjust the HUD.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
2. Start the engine and press the top or bottom of the
HUD button to center the HUD image in your view.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the
cleaner could leak into the unit.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and
down, not side-to-side.
3. Press the DIMMER button until the DIC reads
HUD DIMMING. Then use the brightness button
to adjust the desired intensity.
If the ignition is on and you cannot see the HUD image,
check to see if:
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by the
light conditions in the direction the vehicle is facing
and where you have the HUD set. If you are facing a
dark object or a heavily shaded area, the HUD may
anticipate that you are entering a dark area and may
begin to dim.
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
• The brightness is adjusted properly.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
• Ambient light in the direction the vehicle is facing
is low.
To turn off the HUD, press the brightness button down
until the image disappears.
on page 6-83.
Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image
harder to see.
Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the HUD
As light shines out from the HUD, it is possible for light
to shine back in. In rare occurrences, when the sun
is at a specific angle and position, the sun’s rays can
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) messages
may appear in the HUD:
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
CRUISE SPEED LIMITED: This message indicates that
the vehicle speed has been reduced below the set
speed due to ACC limitations. The set speed is too high
and ACC cannot detect other vehicles at far enough
distances for the system to operate properly.
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
console storage compartment, on the forward left side.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
TIGHT CURVE: This message indicates that ACC
has reduced the vehicle speed due to a tight curve in
the road. Once the road straightens, ACC will return to
the selected set speed or follow distance setting.
See “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” under Turn
information.
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your vehicle’s battery.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on accessory power outlets.
You may also see an ACC active symbol, alert symbol
or vehicle ahead symbol. See “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” under Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
on page 3-7 for more information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located under a
lid in the front console to the right of the shift lever.
Press the left side of the lid and it will open
automatically.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and
let go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable
items are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
your dealer/retailer for the proper installation of the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
Climate Controls
AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and
the temperature is set, the system automatically controls
the temperature, air delivery mode, air conditioning
compressor and the fan speed. AUTO will appear on
the display.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation for
the vehicle can be controlled.
1. Press the AUTO button.
When the vehicle is first started, the system will recall the
last temperature fan and mode settings for that driver.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C). An initial
setting of 73°F (23°C) is suggested.
Choosing the warmest or coldest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. If the system is set at the warmest
or coldest temperature setting, the system remains
in manual mode at that temperature and it will
not go into automatic mode.
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan
speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system starts
out blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting. The length of
time needed for warm up will depend on the outside
temperature and the length of time that has
elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.
A. Driver and Passenger
Power/Temperature
Buttons
B. Heated Seats
C. Recirculation
D. Defrost
F. Display
G. AUTO
H. Fan Control
I. Air Delivery Mode
Control
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature,
if necessary.
J. Air Conditioning Off
E. Rear Window Defogger
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can switch from English to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation
If the passenger PWR button is off, the driver temperature
switch controls the temperature for the entire vehicle.
«9 ª(Fan Control): Press to increase or decrease
the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels automatic
operation and places the system in manual mode.
Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information,
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
ªN «(Air Delivery Mode Control ): Press to
change the direction of the airflow inside of the vehicle.
Changing the mode cancels automatic operation and
places the system in manual mode. Press the
AUTO button to return to automatic operation.
Manual Operation
w PWR x (Power/Temperature): Press the PWR
button on the left side of the climate control panel to turn
the entire climate control system on or off. Press w or x
to increase or decrease the temperature inside the
vehicle.
Press the PWR button on the right side of the climate
control panel to turn the passenger climate control
system on or off. Press w or x to increase or decrease
the temperature for the passenger.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
In this mode, the system automatically turns off the
recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is near or below freezing.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
% (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. In automatic operation, cooler air
is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the
floor outlets.
A/C OFF (Air Conditioning): Press to turn off the air
conditioning compressor. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation. The compressor cannot be turned
off in either the defrost or floor/defog mode.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield and side window
outlets.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. The air conditioning compressor
also comes on.
- (Floor/Defog): This mode clears windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor
outlets and side windows. In this mode, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is near or
below freezing.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
Recirculation is not available in defrost or floor/defog
modes.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may cause
the air inside the vehicle to become too dry. To prevent
this from happening, after the air in the vehicle has
cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
1 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Press to direct air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side windows.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger only works when the engine
is running.
( (Heated/Cooled Seat): Press to turn the feature on.
It automatically turns off when the vehicle is turned
more information.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. Clear as much snow from the
rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed when traveling less than
30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the defogger
only runs for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by turning off
the engine.
Sensors
There are several sensors on the vehicle that measure
the temperature and the sun’s effect on passenger
comfort.
The solar sensor is located on top of the instrument panel
near the windshield. It monitors the solar heat then uses
the information to maintain the selected temperature
when operating in AUTO mode by initiating needed
adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and the air
delivery system. The system may also supply cooler air to
the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation
mode will also be activated, as necessary. Do not cover
the sensor or the system will not work properly.
The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help
clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrors
when the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger and heated mirrors are
automatically disabled when the retractable hardtop
is moving or down.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
This sensor reads the outside air temperature and
helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle.
The outside temperature will be displayed in the
navigation system only when the engine is running.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a false
reading of the temperature.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the thumbwheel to open or close the outlets.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into the vehicle.
If the outside temperature goes up, the display
temperature will not change until:
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h)
for five minutes.
• Keep the area around the base of the instrument
panel console and air path under the seats clear
of objects to help circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (51 km/h)
for two and one-half minutes.
These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature
goes down, the outside temperature will be shown
when the vehicle is started. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
from the previous vehicle operation.
There is also an inside temperature sensor located to
the left of the ignition button. The automatic climate
control system uses this sensor to receive information,
so if it is blocked or covered, the system will not
function properly.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
The passenger compartment air filter removes certain
particles from the air, including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter may need to be
replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of the routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4 for more information.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
To check or replace the air filter, do the following:
1. With the hood open, unlatch and remove the
access panel.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
The passenger compartment air filter and access
panel are located on the passenger side of the
engine compartment near the battery. See Engine
information on location.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
2. Pull the old filter out of the housing.
3. Insert the new filter into the housing.
4. Reinstall the air filter access panel.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to show how the vehicle is running.
It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is left and many other things needed to drive safely and
economically. The instrument panel cluster indicator warning lights, gages and DIC messages are explained on
the following pages.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer displays the speed in either miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
page 3-57 for more information.
There is only one scale for mph and km/h. Use the Driver
Information Center (DIC) controls to switch between mph
for more information. The cluster will calculate the proper
speed and move the needle to the correct position. Either
the MPH or the km/h telltale will illuminate, depending on
which measurement is chosen.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Fuel will shut off at about 6700 rpm.
The odometer is part of the Driver Information
page 3-57 for more information.
If the vehicle is continually driven at the fuel shut off
rpm, the engine could be damaged. Be sure to operate
the vehicle below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce the
rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime comes on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light also
comes on and stay on for
several seconds, then
it flashes for several more.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The rearview mirror has
a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage
This light comes on briefly
When the vehicle is in
accessory mode, the
voltmeter shows the
voltage output of the
battery. When the engine
is running, it shows
the voltage output of the
charging system.
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light
on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
The reading will change as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, the instrument panel cluster
and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) will read LOW VOLTAGE
when the vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it checked
right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading at
10 volts or below could drain the battery and disable
the vehicle.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while driving and a LOW BRAKE
FLUID message is showing on the DIC, pull off the road
and stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push.
Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor and it may take
longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
page 5-26.
Brake System Warning Light
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking,
though, both parts need to be working well.
{ CAUTION:
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on when the engine is started.
If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn if there is a problem.
If this warning light stays on after the engine is started,
the parking brake may still be set or there could be
to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
the brake system inspected right away.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
The Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
system warning light
comes on briefly as the
engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator lights go off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on,
the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving and
the DIC shows a SERVICE TRACTION SYS or
a SERVICE STABILITRAK message, there is a
problem with the Traction Control System (TCS)
or the StabiliTrak® system and the vehicle needs
service.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Traction Control system and/or StabiliTrak®
system are turned off, the light comes on and a
chime sounds. The DIC displays either TRACTION
SYSTEM OFF or TRAC/STABILITRAK OFF message.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
When this light is on, the TCS system does not limit
wheel spin and/or the StabiliTrak® system does
not assist with vehicle control.
When the Traction Control System and/or StabiliTrak®
system are turned on, the light turns off and a chime
sounds. The DIC displays either a TRACTION SYSTEM
ON or TRAC/STABILITRAK ON message.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
As the pointer nears 260°F (125°C), your engine coolant
temperature is high. A message may display on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) depending on how high
the temperature is. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-60 for more information.
information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Light
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
For vehicles with the tire
pressure light, it comes on
briefly when the engine
is started. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working
normally the indicator light
then goes off.
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
This comes on briefly
while starting the engine.
If it does not come on,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
This light also comes on when one or more of the tires
is significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) can accompany the light. See DIC
information.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so.
If underinflated, inflate the tire to the proper pressure.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light flashes for approximately 60 seconds
and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition
for more information.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The following can prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel.
Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run
as efficiently as designed and may cause:
stalling after start-up, stalling when the vehicle
is changed into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away once the engine is
warmed up.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if the battery has
recently been replaced or if the battery has run down.
The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This can take several days of routine driving. If this
has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running.
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in
the passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-24. Press the bottom of the Acc. button on
the instrument panel and hold the button down for
five seconds. The instrument panel, including the
check engine light, will light up and the ignition will be
on, but the engine will not start — press the bottom
of the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,
the accessory power mode will be turned on, but not
the ignition. After the bulb check, press and release
the Acc. button again to turn the ignition off and avoid
draining the vehicle’s battery.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
outside temperature and oil viscosity. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display messages
regarding the oil condition. See DIC Warnings and
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine
oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot
days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still
be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-20.
This light comes on
whenever the headlamps
are on.
United States Only
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
for more information.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press RESET to acknowledge a DIC message(s).
Pressing RESET will also turn off a DIC message but
the LOW FUEL message will come on again in
10 minutes if fuel has not been added to the vehicle.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage indicates
about how much fuel is left
when the ignition is
turned on.
Here are five things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads the full symbol.
• It takes more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fill it.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, LOW
FUEL will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display. At this time, there is still have a little fuel left,
but the vehicle’s fuel tank should be filled soon.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty when
the ignition is turned off.
• The gage reading may change slightly within the
first several minutes after starting the vehicle.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) can be used to
show more detailed fuel information. The DIC,
can also display:
Driver Information Center (DIC)
This display gives you the status of many of the
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display
driver personalization features and warning/status
messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display,
located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster.
• AVERAGE XX.X MPG (Average Miles Per
Gallon): The fuel economy calculated for the
last 20 gallons (76 L) of fuel used, or since the
display was last reset.
• INST XX.X MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per
Gallon): The fuel economy calculated for current
driving conditions.
DIC Operation and Displays
These buttons are located
to the right of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel, near the air outlets.
• RANGE XXX MI: The approximate distance that
can be driven before refueling.
more information.
«4 ª(Information): Press to scroll through the
available features which include the odometer, trip
odometers, fuel range, miles per gallon, average speed,
timer, tire pressure, and remaining oil life.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RANGE xxx MI: This feature shows about how many
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive without
refilling the fuel tank. Once the range drops below
40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will show LOW.
+ (Interior Lamps): Press to turn the interior lamps
on and off.
OPTIONS: Press to choose personal options that are
available on the vehicle.
If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, the
range displayed on the DIC could be abnormally low.
The vehicle must be driven 5-10 miles (8-16 km) to get
an accurate reading.
RESET: Press to reset a feature. It is also used to
switch between English and Metric options.
Use the information button to scroll through the following
options:
AVERAGE xx.x MPG (Average Miles Per Gallon):
This feature shows the approximate fuel economy the
vehicle has averaged since the last time the value
was reset. To reset the average miles per gallon, press
the information button to display AVERAGE xx.x MPG,
then press and hold the RESET button until AVERAGE
00.0 MPG is displayed.
ODOMETER: This feature shows how far the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Use the ENG/METRIC feature to switch between
English and Metric units.
TRIP A: This feature will record the distance traveled
since the last time it was reset. Press and hold the
RESET button to return to zero. If the vehicle is first sold
in the United States, the trip odometer will return to
zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If the vehicle is first
sold in Canada, the trip odometer will return to zero after
1,242 miles (1 999 km).
INST xx.x MPG (Instantaneous Miles Per Gallon):
This feature shows the instantaneous fuel economy
which varies with your driving conditions, such as
acceleration, braking, and the grade of the road being
traveled. The RESET button does not function in
this mode.
TRIP B: This feature allows you to record the distance
traveled during a second trip and functions the same
as TRIP A.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVERAGE SPEED: This feature shows the average
speed the vehicle has traveled since the last time
the value was reset. To reset the value, press the
information button to display AVERAGE SPEED, then
press and hold the RESET button until AVERAGE
SPEED 00.0 is displayed.
FRONT Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
pressure for the front left and right tires.
REAR Lxx Rxx PSI: This feature shows the tire
pressure for the rear left and right tires.
OIL LIFE: This feature shows the estimated oil life
information. To reset the engine oil life system, see
to be reset after you have had the oil changed.
ELAPSED TIME: This feature is like a stopwatch, in
that you can clock the time it takes to get from one point
to another.
To operate, press the information button to display
ELAPSED TIME. Each of the fields for the hours,
minutes, and seconds are two numeric digits.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring oil
life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
for more information.
Once ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00 is displayed, press the
RESET button to start the timing feature. Press the
RESET button again to stop it. If you will be starting and
stopping the vehicle, during a trip for instance, the
ELAPSED TIME feature will automatically start timing
where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press
and hold the RESET button until the display reads
ELAPSED TIME 00:00:00. Press the information button
to exit from the ELAPSED TIME display.
ENG/METRIC (English/Metric): This feature allows
you to switch the DIC displays between English
and Metric. Press the RESET button to switch the
display between English and Metric. There will be an
arrow next to the option that is selected.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
passenger airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in
motion. You should have the passenger buckle their
safety belt.
DIC Warnings and Messages
These messages appear if there is a problem detected
in one of the vehicle’s systems. You must then press
RESET to clear the display screen for further use.
However, be sure to take any message that appears
on the display screen seriously and remember that
pressing the RESET button will only make the message
disappear, not the problem.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the
vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger safety belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
DIC messages can also be displayed in English,
French, German, Italian, Japanese, and Spanish.
BUCKLE SEAT BELT
This message reminds you to buckle the driver
safety belt.
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ACTIVE
This message displays when the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) is adjusting brake pressure to help avoid
a braking skid.
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
ignition is on, the driver safety belt is unbuckled, and the
vehicle is in motion. You should buckle the safety belt.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
displays, so adjust your driving accordingly. The
message may stay on for a few seconds after the
system stops adjusting brake pressure.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will
be repeated. If the driver safety belt is already buckled,
this message and chime will not come on.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster.
information.
BUCKLE PASSENGER
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger
safety belt.
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver safety belt is buckled,
the passenger safety belt is unbuckled with the
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE OIL NOW
CLOSE CARGO DIVIDER
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator must be
This message displays if the cargo divider is not in
place. Open the trunk and make sure the cargo divider
is secure and no objects are on the divider. See Rear
COOLANT OVER TEMP (Temperature)
CHARGE SYSTEM FAULT
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle in P (Park) until it cools down and the message is
removed. Do not increase engine speed above a
normal idle. If it does not cool down, turn off the engine
and have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
before driving it again. Severe engine damage can result
from an overheated engine. See Engine Overheating
on page 6-27.
This message displays when a problem with the
charging system has been detected. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Check the fuel cap to make sure that it is
on properly.
CRUISE NOT READY
CLEAN RADAR CRUISE
This message indicates that the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) will not activate due to a temporary condition.
The vehicle does not require service. If this message
displays when you attempt to activate the system,
continue driving for several minutes, then try to activate
the system again.
If the vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
is disabled because the radar is blocked and cannot
detect vehicles in your path. It may also activate during
heavy rain or due to road spray. To clean the system,
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
exterior lamps is recommended. It has become dark
enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps. This message also displays if the
optional Rainsense™ wiping feature is on and the
Twilight Sentinel is off.
DRIVER NO. X (1 OR 2)
This message displays when the vehicle is started or
when there is a change of driver. The message
shows which driver is activating the personalization
feature. It will only stay on for five seconds.
HIGH TRANS (Transmission) TEMP
(Temperature)
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE
This message displays when the engine has overheated.
Stop and turn the engine off immediately to avoid
page 6-27. A multiple chime also sounds when
this message displays.
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
the vehicle is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle
until it cools down or until this message is removed.
HIGH VOLTAGE
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE
ENGINE RPM
If this message displays, the control system has
determined that continued operation at the existing
engine speed may lead to engine overheating. Lower
the engine speed by upshifting the transmission or drive
at a lower speed.
This message displays when the electrical charging
system is overcharging. To avoid being stranded, have
the electrical system checked by your dealer/retailer.
You can reduce the charging overload by using
the accessories. Turn on the lamps and radio, set the
climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on HI,
and turn the rear window defogger on. You can monitor
battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the information
button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the
engine is running.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
This message displays if it is dark enough outside and
the headlamps and Twilight Sentinel® controls are
off. This message informs the driver that turning on the
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOT ENGINE–A/C OFF
LOW COOLANT
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
You can continue to drive the vehicle. If this message
continues to display, have the system repaired by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid
compressor damage.
This message displays when there is a low level of
engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Engine
LOW FUEL
This message displays when the fuel supply is less
than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and the display is turned off.
A single chime also sounds when this message is
displayed.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
LOW OIL LEVEL
LEFT DOOR AJAR
For correct operation of the low oil sensing system,
the vehicle should be on a level surface. A false LOW
OIL LEVEL message may display if the vehicle is parked
on a grade. The oil level sensing system does not
check for actual oil level if the engine has been off for a
short period of time, and the oil level is never checked
while the engine is running. If the LOW OIL LEVEL
message displays, and the vehicle has been parked on
level ground with the engine off for at least 30 minutes,
the oil level should be checked by observing the oil
dipstick. Prior to checking the oil level, make sure the
engine has been off for a few minutes and the vehicle is
on a level surface. Then check the dipstick and add
This message displays anytime the engine is running,
the transmission is not in P (Park), and the driver door
is open or ajar. A chime sounds when the vehicle’s
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
LOW BRAKE FLUID
This message displays if the engine is running to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the
brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
page 6-32.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and stays on, have it checked immediately by your
dealer/retailer to determine the cause of this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories. You can monitor battery
voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button.
The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
LOW WASHER FLUID
If this message displays while the engine is running,
stop the engine and do not operate the vehicle until the
cause of low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage
to the engine can result. A multiple chime sounds when
this message is displayed.
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
LOW VOLTAGE
MAX (Maximum) SPEED XX MPH
(XX KM/H)
This message displays when the electrical system
is charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has
been drained. If this message displays immediately
after starting, it is possible that the generator can still
recharge the battery. The battery should recharge while
driving, but may take a few hours to do so. Consider
using an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after
returning home or to a final destination. Make sure you
follow the manufacturer’s instructions. If this message
displays while driving or after starting the vehicle
This message displays when a failure in the magnetic
ride control system has occurred. The Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) determines the speed to which
the vehicle is limited. Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer if this message appears.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO FOB DETECTED
This message displays if the vehicle does not detect the
presence of a keyless access transmitter when you
have attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has
just closed. The following conditions may cause this
message to appear:
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving
the keyless access transmitter away from these
devices when starting the vehicle. In addition,
PDA devices and remote garage and gate openers
may also generate Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI) that may interfere with the keyless access
transmitter. Do not carry the keyless access
transmitter in the same pocket or bag as these
devices.
If moving the transmitter to different locations
within the vehicle does not help, place the
transmitter in the glove box transmitter pocket
with the buttons facing to the right and then press
the START button.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as
airports, automatic toll booths, and some gas
stations, have EMI fields which may interfere with
the keyless access transmitter.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO FOB, OFF OR RUN?
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message displays when a keyless access
This message displays when the vehicle is reducing
engine power because the transmission is being placed
in gear under conditions that may cause damage to the
vehicle’s engine, transmission, or ability to accelerate.
Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability to
accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction
in performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is
driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed
while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may
be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while
you are trying to turn the ignition off. The vehicle may
be near a strong radio antenna signal causing the
keyless access system to be jammed. The vehicle will
remain in ACCESSORY until the vehicle is turned off or
is restarted, or five minutes has expired. If you turn
the ignition off and you cannot find the keyless access
transmitter, you will not be able to restart the vehicle.
The keyless access transmitter needs to be inside of the
vehicle in order for the vehicle to start. See Starting
OVER SPEED WARNING
RIGHT DOOR AJAR
This message displays when the vehicle speed exceeds
a certain limit as required by some export countries.
A chime sounds when this message is displayed.
This message displays anytime the engine is running,
the transmission is not in P (Park), and the passenger
door is open or ajar. A chime sounds if the vehicle’s
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
PRESS BRAKE TO START
SERVICE A/C
This message displays to inform you that the brake
pedal must be applied to start the vehicle. Make sure
you are pressing the brake pedal all the way down.
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE ABS (Antilock Brake System)
SERVICE AFS (Adaptive Forward
Lighting System) LAMPS
If this message displays when you are driving, stop
as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the system. If the message
stays on, or comes back on again while you are driving,
the vehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the Adaptive Forward
Lighting System (AFS) is disabled and needs service.
See your dealer/retailer. See Adaptive Forward Lighting
If the SERVICE ABS message is being displayed, the
Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak® System
will also be disabled. The Driver Information Center
will scroll three messages: SERVICE ABS, SERVICE
TRACTION SYS, and SERVICE STABILITRAK, and the
antilock brake system and traction control warning
lights on the instrument panel cluster will be illuminated.
acknowledge these messages by pressing the RESET
button three times. When the service message is
displayed, the computer controlled systems will not
assist the driver and you should have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE ELECT (Electrical) SYSTEM
This message displays if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM
This message displays when the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel
system. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message will also be displayed when the cluster is
not getting fuel information from the PCM.
SERVICE RADAR CRUISE
If the vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
is disabled and needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when there is a problem with
the Magnetic Ride Control System. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when a non-emissions related
powertrain malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SHIFT TO PARK
SERVICE TRACTION SYS (System)
This message displays if the vehicle is not in P (Park)
when the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will be
in accessory mode. Once the shift lever is moved to
P (Park), the vehicle will turn off.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the Traction Control System (TCS). Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
STABILITRAK ACTIVE
If this message displays, it means there may be a
problem with the stability enhancement system. If you
see this message, try to reset the system. Stop, turn off
the engine, then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer/retailer for service. Reduce your
speed and drive accordingly. A single chime also
sounds when this message is displayed.
You may see this message on the DIC. It means that
an advanced, computer-controlled system has come on
to help the vehicle continue to go in the direction in
which you are steering. This stability enhancement
system activates when the computer senses that the
vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit
a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road.
When the system is on, you may hear a noise or
feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem with
the transmission. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
When this message is on, continue to steer in the
direction you want to go. The system is designed to help
you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by
making the most of whatever road conditions will permit.
If this message comes on, you will know that something
has caused the vehicle to start to spin, so consider
slowing down. A single chime also sounds when this
message is displayed.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STABILITRAK READY
TOP INOP (Inoperative) OUT OF PARK
This message displays if the retractable hardtop
button is pressed while the vehicle is not in P (Park).
If this message displays and a chime sounds, the
system has completed the functional check of the
StabiliTrak® System.
TOP MOTOR OVER TEMP (Temperature)
SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is pressed and the hardtop pump motor
temperature is over 221°F (105°C). Wait for the hardtop
pump motor to cool down before using the retractable
hardtop.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-50. Several conditions may cause this message
page 6-57 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
TOP NOT SECURE
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is released before the top open or close operation
is complete. Press and hold the retractable hardtop
button to fully open or close the top.
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP
TRAC (Traction) SYSTEM ACTIVE
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is pressed and the hardtop pump motor
temperature is below −4°F (−20°C). Wait for the hardtop
pump motor to warm up before using the retractable
hardtop.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. This message stays
on for a few seconds after the TCS stops limited
wheel spin.
TOP INOP (Inoperative) – VALET ON
This message displays when the retractable hardtop
button is pressed and the valet switch is on. Turn off the
valet switch before using the retractable hardtop.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAC (Traction)/STABILITRAK OFF
Other Messages
This message displays when both the Traction Control
System (TCS) and the StabiliTrak® System are off.
This message will remain until the systems are turned
on again.
Here are more messages that you can receive on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the RESET button.
• ACCESSORY MODE ON
• CHANGE OIL SOON
TRAC (Traction)/STABILITRAK ON
This message displays when both the Traction Control
System (TCS) and the StabiliTrak® System are on.
TRACTION SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is off, but the StabiliTrak® System
remains on.
• FOB BATTERY LOW
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
TRACTION SYSTEM ON
• HIGH TIRE PRESS LF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is on.
• HIGH TIRE PRESS RF
• HIGH TIRE PRESS LR
TRUNK AJAR
This message displays when the trunk is open while the
vehicle is running and is not in P (Park).
• HIGH TIRE PRESS RR
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF
• INTRUSION SENSOR ON
• MAX # FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• OFF-ACC TO LEARN
• KNOWN FOB
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• READY FOR FOB #X
• LEFT FRONT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• LEFT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
• RIGHT FRT TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
• LOW TIRE PRESS LF
• LOW TIRE PRESS RF
• RIGHT REAR TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55,
REDUCED HNDLG
• WAIT XX MINUTES
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
page 2-5.
• LOW TIRE PRESS LR
• LOW TIRE PRESS RR
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature Programming
DIC Vehicle Personalization
To change feature preferences, make sure the vehicle
is running and in P (Park). To avoid excessive drain
on the battery, it is recommended that the headlamps
are turned off. Press the OPTIONS button and the Driver
Information Center (DIC) will display the current driver
for a few seconds, then display the first personalization
menu item. You can now use the OPTIONS button
to change the setting of the displayed feature. Press the
top or bottom of the information button to scroll up or
down the list of features. When you get to a feature you
want to change, press the OPTIONS button again.
When you are finished, press the RESET button to exit
the personalization menu. If no button is pressed within
45 seconds, the DIC will exit the personalization menu.
The vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting for
up to two drivers. The back of the keyless access
transmitters are labelled 1 or 2.
The current driver preferences are recalled when one of
the following occurs:
• The lock or unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter, programmed as 1 or 2, is pressed.
• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on
the driver seat is pressed. See Memory Seat,
information.
• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver door.
The following are DIC options that will be available in the
personalization menu.
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
Auto Recall
This feature allows the steering column, outside mirrors
and the driver seat to automatically move to the
current driver’s set position when the engine starts.
The DIC will display AUTO RECALL OFF or AUTO
RECALL ON. Press the OPTIONS button to change
the setting.
If a keyless access transmitter is programmed as
#3 or #4, the personalization system will not recognize
the transmitter. The Driver Information Center (DIC)
will not display a current driver number and the features
that are normally programmed through the DIC will
be set to the default states. Also, if the OPTIONS button
is pressed, the DIC does not display the menus used
to set personalizations, but instead displays OPTIONS
UNAVAILABLE for a few seconds.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Exit Recall
Exit Lights
This feature allows the steering column and driver seat
to automatically move to the current driver’s exit
position when one of the following occurs:
This feature activates the parking lamps and front fog
lamps for 15, 30 or 90 seconds. This will occur when the
vehicle is off or in RAP and the headlamps are on
due to the automatic headlamp system. The parking
lamps and front fog lamps will remain on until the driver
selected time period expires, the exterior lamp control
is activated or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP or accessory
mode and the driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter is
pressed.
The DIC will display EXIT LIGHTS OFF, EXIT
LIGHTS - 15 SEC, EXIT LIGHTS - 30 SEC, or EXIT
LIGHTS - 90 SEC. Press the OPTIONS button to
change the setting.
The DIC will display AUTO EXIT RECALL OFF or
AUTO EXIT RECALL ON. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
Flash at Unlock
Approach Lights
This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for
two short flashes when the unlock or trunk button on
the keyless access transmitter is pressed. This will only
occur when the vehicle is off.
This feature activates the parking lamps, front fog lamps
and back-up lamps during low light periods when the
unlock button on the keyless access transmitter is
pressed, both doors are closed and the vehicle is off or
in RAP. The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until
a door is opened, the lock button on the keyless access
transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off
or in RAP.
The DIC will display NO FLASH AT UNLOCK or
FLASH AT UNLOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to
change the setting.
The DIC will display APPROACH LIGHTS OFF or
APPROACH LIGHTS ON. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
one keyless access transmitter has been removed from
the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock after
eight seconds.
Flash at Lock
This feature activates the front and rear turn signals for
one long flash when the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter is pressed. This will only occur when
the vehicle is off. If the lock button is pressed again
within five seconds, the horn will sound regardless of
which setting you have selected.
For example, if there are two keyless access
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.
The DIC will display NO FLASH AT LOCK or
FLASH AT LOCK. Press the OPTIONS button to
change the setting.
You may temporarily disable the passive door locking
feature by pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door. Passive door locking will
then remain disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or
until the power mode transitions from the off power mode.
FOB Reminder
This feature sounds the horn three times when the
driver door is closed and there is a keyless access
transmitter inside the interior of the vehicle. This will only
occur when the vehicle is off.
You can select to not have the horn sound when the
passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting, the doors
will automatically lock eight seconds after you turn the
ignition off, remove a keyless access transmitter
from the interior of the vehicle, and close both doors.
The DIC will display FOB REMINDER OFF or
FOB REMINDER HORN. Press the OPTIONS button
to change the setting.
Passive Locking
You can also select to have the horn sound once when
the passive lock occurs. If you choose this setting,
the doors will automatically lock and the horn will chirp
eight seconds after you turn the ignition off, remove
a keyless access transmitter from the interior of
the vehicle, and close both doors.
This feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When the
ignition is turned off and all doors become closed,
the vehicle will determine how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not want the
horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter immediately after
removing it from the interior and closing the doors.
This will lock the doors and cancel the passive locking
for this ignition cycle.
Park Assist
This feature tilts the passenger side mirror downward
when the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse). This can
help you to see the curb while backing up. If you
adjust the mirror while in R (Reverse), the new position
will be saved as the park assist position.
The DIC will display PASSIVE LOCKING OFF, SILENT
PASSIVE LOCK, or HORN AT PASSIVE LOCK.
Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
The DIC will display PARK ASSIST OFF or
PARK ASSIST ON.
Language
Passive Unlocking
This feature allows you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you approach and open
the driver door with the keyless access transmitter.
You can choose to have the driver door unlock or
more information.
This feature allows you to select the language the
DIC and Head-Up Display (HUD), uses to display
messages.
The DIC will display ENGLISH, FRENCH, GERMAN,
ITALIAN, JAPANESE, or SPANISH. Press the
OPTIONS button to change the setting.
The DIC will display PASSIVE UNLK DRIVER or
PASSIVE UNLK BOTH. Press the OPTIONS button to
change this setting.
If you become stuck in a language that you do not
understand, hold the OPTIONS and RESET buttons
for five seconds. The DIC will scroll through all
available languages for as long as the buttons are held.
Each language option will display in its own language.
For example, English will be displayed as ENGLISH,
Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. When the desired language
is available, release the buttons and the DIC will set
to this language.
Auto Unlock
This feature automatically unlocks either the driver door
or both doors, depending on the setting, when the
shift lever is moved to P (Park).
The DIC will display AUTO UNLOCK OFF, AUTO
UNLOCK DRIVER, or AUTO UNLOCK BOTH.
Press the OPTIONS button to change the setting.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Computer
Audio System(s)
Read the following pages to become familiar with the
audio system’s features.
Oil Life Indicator
This feature lets you know when to change the engine
oil. It is based on the engine oil temperatures and
your driving patterns.
{ CAUTION:
To see the display, press the information button several
times until OIL LIFE appears. If you see 99% OIL LIFE,
99 percent of the current oil life remains.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
The DIC may display a CHANGE OIL NOW message.
If you see CHANGE OIL NOW, it means the oil life
is gone. For more information, see Scheduled
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
When the oil is changed, you will need to reset the
Always keep a written record of the mileage and date
when you changed your oil.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
page 5-2.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and
natural voice.
Bluetooth®
Audio System
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The
range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m).
Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones
are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth
system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more information on
compatible phones.
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio
system volume knob, during a call, to change the
volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
Bluetooth Controls
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio Steering
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle
is moving.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
c ª(Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
call, or to cancel an operation.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide
for more information.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the list
on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on
the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that
was provided in Step 3.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use a
name that best describes the phone. This name will
be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linking to a Different Phone
Using the Store Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. After the system stores the phone number,
it responds with “Please say the name tag”
followed by a tone.
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
Using the Directory Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Please
say the first digit to store” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
Deleting Name Tags
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• Delete
To use the delete all name tags command:
• Delete all name tags
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Using the Delete Command
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Calls can be made using the following commands:
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Dial
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with
“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say
the first digit to dial” followed by a tone.
• Digit Dial
• Call
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
• Re-dial
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Call Command
Using the Re-dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the last
number called from the connected Bluetooth phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through
the audio speakers.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c ª to ignore a call.
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when another
call is active. The original call is placed on hold.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original
call with no action.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
• Press c ª to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
To Mute a call
Three-Way Calling
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Cancel Mute
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
Ending a Call
Press c ªto end a call.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transferring a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a number during a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Information
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
The vehicle has audio steering wheel controls. These
controls may differ depending on the vehicle’s options.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
On the left side, the vehicle may have:
• SEEK, SRCE, Heated Steering Wheel and Cruise
Control Cancel.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• SRCE, Heated Steering Wheel, Adaptive Cruise
Control Gap, and Cruise Control Cancel.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Audio Controls With
Heated Steering Wheel
and Cruise Control
Cancel
Audio Controls With
Heated Steering Wheel
and Adaptive Cruise
and GAP
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right side controls are the same for all vehicles.
SCAN: To scan stations, press and hold this button for
a few seconds, the radio goes to a station, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
y z (Previous/Next): Press to go to the previous or
the next radio station stored as a favorite.
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the
previous or to the next track.
c ª(Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
Right-Side Audio
Controls
call, or to cancel an operation.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. See the following descriptions of the controls that
can adjusted.
the radio volume.
b g (Voice Recognition): Press and release to
initiate voice recognition for the Navigation System.
information.
©SEEK ¨: Press to go to the previous or the next
radio station.
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Press and hold b g for longer than two seconds to
interact with the OnStar® or Bluetooth® systems.
page 3-77 for more information about these features.
Press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or the
next track while listening to a CD.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio
(AM, FM), XM and CD.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Radio Reception
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or
hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling
or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or
tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
For better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on the radio.
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs
Diversity Antenna System
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the
disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly or
not at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint
free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make
sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
The AM-FM antenna is a hidden self tuning system.
It optimizes the AM and FM signals relative to the
vehicle’s position and radio station source.
No maintenance or adjustments are needed.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The vehicle may have the XM™ Satellite Radio
antennas that are located in the outside rear view
mirrors. These antennas are hidden from view and
are not accessible.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players because
the lens of the CD optics can become contaminated
by lubricants.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Navigation System Screen
D. TUNE/SEEK Key. See “Playing the Radio” under
E. Audio/Adjust Key. See “Main Audio Menu” under
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
{ CAUTION:
Read this manual thoroughly to become familiar with
how the navigation system operates.
The navigation system includes navigation and audio
functions.
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often
while using the navigation system could cause a
crash resulting in injury or death to you or others.
Focus your attention on driving.
Keeping your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive is important for safe driving. The navigation
system has built-in features intended to help you do this.
Some features may be disabled while driving. Note, these
functions are grayed-out. A grayed-out function indicates
it is not available when the vehicle is moving.
{ CAUTION:
All functions are available when the vehicle is parked.
Do the following before driving:
Avoid looking too long or too often at the moving
map on the navigation screen. This could cause a
crash and you or others can be injured or killed.
Use the turn-by-turn voice guidance directions
whenever possible.
• Become familiar with the navigation system
operation, hard keys on the faceplate, and
touch-sensitive screen buttons of the navigation
system.
• Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations,
setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.
• Set up the navigation features before beginning
driving, such as entering an address or a preset
destination.
• Set up the phone numbers in advance so they can be
called easily with the press of a single button or a
single voice command (for navigation systems
equipped with phone capability).
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the navigation system to:
• Plan a route.
Deleting Personal Information
This navigation system can record and store
destinations. At times, such as when you are disposing
of the vehicle, you may want to delete these
destinations. Refer to the following sections to delete
the destination information that has been stored.
• Select a destination using various methods and
choices.
• Follow turn-by-turn route and map guidance with
voice prompts, only if permitted by traffic laws,
controls, and conditions.
See “Deleting Single Memory Points”, “Deleting All
Memory Points”, “Preset Dests.” (Destinations), “Home”
and “Previous Dest.” (Destination) under Edit Memory
Always be alert, obey traffic and roadway laws, and
instructions, regardless of the guidance from the
navigation system. Because the navigation system uses
street map information that does not include all traffic
restrictions or the latest road changes, it may suggest
using a road that is now closed for construction or a turn
that is prohibited by signs at the intersection. Because
the system uses limited information, you must always
evaluate whether following the system’s directions
is safe and legal for the current conditions.
Storing Radio Station Presets
To set preset radio stations:
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
2. Press the audio source screen button (AM, FM1,
FM2, etc.) and select the desired band (AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1, or XM2 (if equipped), or WX (weather)
(if equipped)).
When the navigation system is turned on, a screen may
appear with the information below, and you must
read and acknowledge the information it contains.
3. Use the TUNE/SEEK arrows to tune to the desired
station.
4. Press and hold one of the six preset screen buttons,
at the bottom of the screen, until a beep is heard
or see the station displayed on the selected preset
button.
After you acknowledge the start up information you will
be able to access the NAV (navigation) and DEST
(destination) functions. Once accessed, you can enter
or delete information in the navigation system or access
other functions. See instructions later in this section.
5. Repeat the steps for each preset.
See “Preset Station Menu” under Navigation Audio
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Clock
Setting the Search Area, Entering an
Address and Point of Interest, Storing a
Home Destination, and Using The
Home or Previous Destinations
Before entering an Address, Point of Interest, Home, or
Preset Destination, select the appropriate region that
contains the final destination. The vehicle must be
stopped to perform this operation.
To set the time:
1. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
2. Press the e / z (Audio/Adjust) hard key.
3. Press the 8 clock symbol screen button.
4. Select the 12H or 24H screen button to display the
time in standard or military time.
5. Press and hold the HOUR and MIN. (minute) arrow
buttons to increase or to decrease the time.
Setting the Search Area
To set the search area:
6. Select the appropriate time zone screen button.
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
7. Select the Daylight Saving Time screen button,
if necessary.
2. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
The radio uses the GPS satellite to set the time.
The vehicle needs to be in an open area to receive the
signal. See “Clock Adjust Menu” under Navigation
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
7. Press the Change screen button.
8. Select the appropriate region numbered screen
button that contains your final destination.
The system returns to the Destination menu. See Enter
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Select the desired street name with the correct
designation (Dr., Ln., St., etc.) from the list.
Entering an Address
To set a destination by entering a street address:
10. If there is more than one city, the system displays
the list of cities that have that street name. Select a
city from the list or select the City screen button
to input the city name.
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
2. Press the PWR/VOL knob to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
11. Enter the house number using the numeric keypad
on the screen and touch the Enter screen button.
The system lists the house number range available
for the street.
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
12. Press the Enter screen button to plan the route.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
Verify the selected Search Area is correct.
more information.
7. Press the Address screen button.
8. Press the Street screen button, then enter the
street name using the alpha keypad on the
screen.
Do not enter directional information or street type,
and use the space screen button between street or
city names. For example, the street name N. Royal
Oak Rd. should be entered as royal oak.
Use the backspace ( V ) screen button if an
incorrect character has been entered.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering a Point of Interest (POI)
Storing a Home Destination
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
To set a destination by entering a Point of Interest (POI):
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
2. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
2. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
6. Press the Edit Memory Point screen button.
7. Press the Home screen button.
8. Press the Register screen button.
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
Verify the selected Search Area is correct.
7. Press the All Points of Interest screen button.
Select a method for entering a destination.
information.
8. Enter the specific title of the POI in the Name space
(i.e. Washington Monument) using the alpha
keypad on the screen.
9. Press the Enter screen button to store the Home
destination.
9. Select the POI from the list.
The L Home icon will be highlighted on the
DESTINATION screen. See “Using The Home or
Previous Destinations” next to use the home
or previous destinations as a route.
10. Press the Enter screen button to plan the route.
Using the Category or City selections aid the
system in finding your POI by limiting the search
options.
page 4-27 for more information.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using The Home or Previous
Destinations
Canceling The Current Route
Guidance is canceled once the final destination has
been reached. To cancel the current route prior to arrival
at the final destination:
These destinations are available for selection while
driving.
1. Press the ROUTE hard key.
1. If the radio is already on with a map disc inserted,
skip to Step 5.
2. Press the Route Preference screen button.
3. Press the Cancel Route screen button.
4. Press the Yes screen button to confirm cancellation.
2. Press the power/volume knob to turn the system on.
3. Insert the DVD map disc. See “Regional Maps”
Guidance Volume
4. A notice may appear. Touch the I AGREE screen
button to proceed.
To adjust the volume of voice guidance prompts, do the
following:
5. Press the ROUTE hard key.
1. Press the MENU hard key.
6. Press the Enter Destination screen button.
Verify the selected Search Area is correct.
2. Press the ON screen button to turn voice volume on.
3. Select the desired volume or select the OFF screen
button. The system will play back the new volume
level.
7. Select the L (Home symbol) or the Previous
Destination screen button.
If the Previous Destination screen button is selected,
a list of the last 10 previous destinations appear.
Select the screen button next to the desired
destination.
See “Voice Guidance Volume Settings” under Setup
8. Press the Enter screen button to plan the route.
See “Home” and “Previous Destination” under Enter
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD: Press to play a CD. The CD screen displays.
Features and Controls
Using the Navigation System
DVD: Press to play a DVD. The DVD screen displays.
This section presents basic information needed to
operate the navigation system.
y TUNE/SEEK z: Press the up or down arrows to go
to the next or previous radio station and stay there.
See “Finding a Station” under Navigation Audio System
on page 4-52.
Use the keys located on each side of the navigation
screen, as well as the available touch-sensitive screen
buttons, to operate the system. See Navigation System
e / z (Audio/Adjust): Press to view the main audio
menu. See “Main Audio Menu” under Navigation
Once the vehicle is moving, various functions become
disabled to reduce driver distraction.
Hard Keys
The following hard keys are located to the left of the
navigation screen:
PWR-VOL (Power/Volume Knob): Press the knob to
turn the audio and navigation systems on and off.
Turn the knob to increase or decrease the volume to
the audio system.
BAND: Press to access the band screen and
switch between AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, and WX
(if equipped). See “Finding a Station” under Navigation
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following hard keys are located to the right of the
navigation screen:
ROUTE: Press to display the PLAN ROUTE menu.
RPT: Press to repeat the current voice guidance
navigation prompt.
MAP: Press to view the map screen showing current
vehicle position.
TILT X : Press to open the navigation system faceplate
for loading or removing the map DVD, a video DVD, or an
audio CD. This key can only be used while the vehicle is
in P (Park).
The map screen can also display the following
information:
page 4-43.
Alpha-Numeric Keypad
Letters of the alphabet, symbols, punctuation, and
numbers, when available, display on the navigation
screen as an alpha or numeric keypad. The alpha
keypad displays when the system needs a city or street
name, entered. A Char at the bottom of the alpha
keypad to access the numeric keypad can be touched
when entering a house address, punctuation mark,
or other character. Touch A - Z to return to the
alpha keypad.
• Distance to destination.
• GPS symbol if GPS signal is not being received.
page 4-49.
• Selected options for reaching your current
destination.
All characters are touch-sensitive screen buttons.
Touch a character to select it.
• Driver Information.
• Radio band and presets.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select the space symbol to enter a space between
characters or the words of a name.
Setup Menu
MENU: Press this key, located to the right of the
navigation screen, to access the SETUP MENU.
V : Select the backspace symbol if an incorrect
character has been selected.
To make the name selections easier, the system only
allows a selection of a character which can follow
the last one entered. For example, if Z is entered,
T could not be entered after it. The system highlights
the available characters and darken the unavailable
characters.
If unsuccessful when entering a name, it may need to
be entered differently. It is also possible that the
map DVD database may not contain that information or
the correct search area has not been selected. See
information.
Touch Sensitive Buttons
Touch-sensitive buttons are located on the screen.
After successfully selecting a screen button, a beep is
heard. These buttons highlight when a feature is
available and are dim when not unavailable. There are
some toggle screen buttons that are light blue when
active and dark blue when inactive.
Map appearance, navigation settings, and voice
guidance volume can be adjusted in the SETUP MENU.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Configuration
Navigation Settings
This feature allows you to reconfigure the navigation
system. If the vehicle is being driven during this
procedure, the system will not be able to adjust the
position or direction of the vehicle.
This menu allows you to change the following options
for the navigation system.
Touch the System Configuration screen button to view:
Adjust Vehicle Position: To correct the position of
the vehicle on the map or to change vehicle position:
1. Touch the Adjust Vehicle Position screen button.
The system displays Position Adjustment. The
vehicle location symbol and the scroll symbol
appear on the map.
2. Use the scroll symbol and the zoom in/zoom out
feature to locate the vehicle position on the map.
3. Touch Enter to set the vehicle position. The system
displays Position Adjustment and two arrows
appear on the map screen.
Restore Default Settings
4. Touch the arrows to adjust the direction of the
vehicle. As you touch the arrows, the vehicle
symbol direction changes.
This feature automatically resets the system to the
default values.
To restore the default settings:
1. Touch the Restore Default Settings screen button.
2. Touch Enter.
5. When the vehicle has been set to the correct
direction, touch Enter. Relocation Complete
displays.
6. Touch Return to exit this menu.
3. Touch Return to exit this menu.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibrate Vehicle Speed Signal: If there are tire
pressure differences or if a spare tire is installed, the
navigation system automatically recalibrates the system.
To manually calibrate the system:
Quick POI (Point of Interest) Selection
This menu allows you to choose a point of interest (POI),
such as gas stations, restaurants, hotels, etc. to be
displayed on the map screen. You can also set a
destination to a specific POI.
1. Touch Start to begin calibration.
2. Touch Return to exit this menu.
Time to Destination
This feature allows you to view the estimated time to
travel from your current position to the destination, and
to reset the average speed to factory default settings.
Estimated travel time is based on calculated route
information and the vehicle’s average speed. Touch ON
to turn this feature on, OFF to turn this feature off, or
Reset to restore vehicle speed default settings. With this
feature on, the estimated travel time to destination
displays along with the distance to destination.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Quick POI Menu
Setting a Destination Using Quick POI
To set the Quick POI list displayed on the map screen:
1. Select the category to replace.
This feature allows you to choose a POI as the
destination. To set a destination using a POI:
1. Touch the POI icon on the map screen to be set
as a destination.
2. Select a Quick POI category from the Quick POI
selection menu list. The system returns to the
Quick POI selection screen when a POI is selected.
The selected icon is surrounded by a blinking box,
and the name of the icon displays. You may
also touch INFO to view the POI name, address,
city, and phone number, if available.
3. Touch Return to save the setting and return to the
previous menu.
Displaying Quick POI Icons
2. Touch the ENT DEST screen button.
If a final destination has already been entered,
the POI can be added as a waypoint. See Edit
To display POI icons of a category on the map screen:
1. Touch the map screen once.
2. Touch the POI button. The Quick POI Selection list
displays.
3. Touch Enter to start planning the route.
4. To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving
the vehicle. Route guidance automatically begins
after a short distance.
3. Select a category type or touch List Categories or
All Local POIs to display the icons of the selected
category on the map screen.
To cancel the route that has just been set:
1. Press the ROUTE hard key.
Removing Quick POI Icons
To remove POI icons from the map screen:
1. Touch the map screen once.
2. Touch the Route Preference screen button.
3. Touch the Cancel Route screen button.
4. Select YES to cancel or NO to continue.
2. Touch the POI OFF screen button. The current POI
icons are removed from the map screen.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn List: Select to have the guidance screen display
several upcoming turns. Directional arrows, street
name, and distance to the next turn displays. As the
next turn approaches, the system displays a closer view
of the upcoming maneuver.
Guidance Appearance
This menu allows you to set the guidance appearance
screen options. This screen is displayed on the map
while on a planned route. The current settings appear as
light blue.
Arrow: Select to have the guidance screen display the
next turn. A directional arrow, street name, and
distance to the turn displays. As the turn approaches,
the system displays a closer view of the upcoming
maneuver.
2D: Select to display the guidance screen as a
two-dimensional view.
3D: Select to display the guidance screen as a
three-dimensional view.
Split Map: Select to display the guidance screen on
the map at all times.
Full Screen: Select to display the guidance screen on
the map when approaching a maneuver.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set 3D Viewing Angle: This feature allows you
to adjust the 3D viewing angle. To do so:
Map Appearance
This menu allows you to set the map appearance screen
options. The current setting appears as light blue.
1. Touch 3D on the MAP APPEARANCE menu.
2. Touch Set 3D Viewing Angle.
The map screen with the 3D viewing angle bar
displays.
3. Touch the up or down arrows to set the viewing
angle.
4. Touch Return to save the settings and to exit this
menu or touch Reset to restore the viewing angle
to the default setting.
2D: Select to display the map as a two-dimensional view.
3D: Select to display the map as a
three-dimensional view.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Guidance Volume Settings
Plan Route
This feature allows you to set the voice prompt volume
level or to turn voice prompts on or off.
To plan a route, press the ROUTE key. The PLAN
ROUTE menu displays.
Set the voice prompt volume level by touching the
numbered buttons to increase or decrease the volume
level. You may also choose to turn the voice prompts off.
Then touch Return to save the setting and to return to
the SETUP MENU.
If a voice prompt is active while the audio system is on,
the audio system volume decreases and the voice
prompts are heard through the driver side front speaker.
Voice prompts are not heard while using voice
recognition.
One of several destination entry methods can be used
for more information.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A total of 60 locations can be stored. The last
10 destinations entered are stored under Previous
Destination. In addition, one memory point can be stored
under the Home category.
Edit Memory Point
This feature allows you to store, delete, and edit
memory points. Touch the Edit Memory Point screen
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to access the EDIT
MEMORY POINT screen.
If all 60 stored points are entered, the system notifies
you that there is no available storage left in memory
points. A memory point must be removed before storing
additional memory points.
Registering Memory Points
To store a memory point:
1. Select a category from the EDIT MEMORY
POINT menu.
2. Touch REGISTER.
3. Select a method for entering a destination. A map
appears displaying the memory point’s location.
4. If available, touch INFO to view the address
information for the memory point.
5. Touch Enter to store the point.
Memory points can be stored in four different categories:
personal, business, entertainment, and marked point.
Memory points are stored when either START or MARK
are selected when setting a destination on the map
or when storing destinations in memory.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Name Editing of a Memory Point
To modify the name of a stored memory point:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the item to be edited.
Editing Memory Points
This feature allows you to edit the contents stored in
memory. The following options are available:
Icon Editing of a Memory Point
3. Touch the NAME screen button and use the alpha
keypad to edit the name. Names may contain up to
15 alpha and/or numeric characters.
Each memory point is displayed with a default icon.
To edit an icon:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the item to be edited.
4. Touch Return to go to the previous screen.
Moving Memory Points
3. Touch the icon. The EDIT MEMORY POINT icon
screen appears.
To move a memory point from one category to another:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the memory point to be edited.
4. Touch the icon you would like to use. The system
then returns to the EDIT MEMORY POINT menu.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
The new memory point icon displays on the map.
3. Touch CATEGORY. A list of categories appear.
The current category for the item will be highlighted
and cannot be selected.
Choose from 18 different icons, three of which are sound
icons. The same icon may be used for other memory
points as well.
4. Touch the screen button for the category you want
the memory point placed in. A pop-up window
appears displaying the change in category.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting a Memory Point
Deleting Single Memory Points
To relocate a memory point’s location:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the memory point to be edited.
To delete a single memory point:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Select the category of the memory point.
4. Touch DELETE.
3. Touch POSITION. A map screen with the position
of this memory point appears.
4. Touch anywhere on the screen to activate the scroll
feature and relocate the memory point. See Maps
on page 4-38.
5. Select the memory point to be deleted.
A confirmation window appears.
6. Touch YES to delete the memory point or NO to
return to the previous menu.
5. Touch Enter to save the memory point’s new
location.
7. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Deleting All Memory Points
Changing the Phone Number of a
Memory Point
To delete all of the memory points in a category:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
To edit or add the phone number of a memory point:
1. Select the category of the memory point.
2. Select the memory point to be edited.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Select the desired category.
3. Touch PHONE and use the numeric keypad to edit
or add the number.
4. Touch the DELETE ALL screen button.
A confirmation window appears.
4. Touch the RETURN button to take you back to the
previous screen when finished.
5. Touch YES to delete the memory points or NO to
return to the previous menu.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Previous Destination Memory
Edit Category
Each time Start is selected from the map screen,
that destination is stored as a memory point under
PREVIOUS DESTINATION. This category stores
up to 10 destinations.
To edit the name of a category:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch EDIT MEMORY POINT.
3. Select the category to be edited.
When the Previous Destination category contains more
than 10 destinations, the system removes the oldest
destination stored and adds the most recent one
selected to the list.
4. Touch the EDIT CATEGORY screen button and
use the alpha keypad to edit the category name.
The name can consist of up to 15 alpha and/or
numeric characters.
So that a previous destination is not lost, move the
destination into a memory point category. See “Moving
Memory Points” earlier in this section for more
information.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Marked Point
Home Memory
A marked point is a memory point which has been stored
by selecting the MARK screen button while traveling on a
planned route. The scroll feature can also be used to plan
a destination on the map after reaching the destination, or
by moving a memory point to a marked point category.
See “Editing Memory Points” earlier in this section for
more information.
This memory point is stored by selecting Home from
the EDIT MEMORY POINT screen. See “Registering
Memory Points” earlier in this section and “Home” under
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Waypoint
Edit Waypoint
To add a waypoint to the route:
1. Touch Add Waypoint.
Waypoints are destinations you can set along the way
to your final destination. This feature allows you to
add, edit, and delete waypoints.
page 4-27.
A map appears showing the location of the
waypoint.
3. Touch Enter to add the waypoint.
4. Touch the ADD screen button to insert the waypoint
in the desired order.
5. The system displays the ROUTE INFORMATION
screen. From this screen, several options are
available.
Five waypoints can be set up on the way to the final
destination.
To access the WAYPOINT menu:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Edit Waypoint.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delete: Touch to delete a waypoint or the final
destination. A confirmation window appears. Touch YES
to delete the point or NO to return to the previous screen.
Delete All: Touch to delete all of the waypoints and the
final destination. A confirmation window appears.
Touch YES to delete all waypoints or NO to return to
the previous screen.
Change: Touch Change to change the final destination.
Add: Touch to add additional waypoints. Refer to the
steps for adding a waypoint listed previously in this
section.
Calculate: Touch to begin route calculation.
This feature is only available if the final destination
has been set.
List: Touch to view the waypoint on the map or to
change the order of the waypoints and final destination.
To change the order, touch CHG ORDER, then touch
the blank screen button next to the destination to select
the order of the waypoints and final destination. Press
the MAP key to view the destination and waypoints
on the map screen.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing a Waypoint
Edit Avoid Point/Area
This feature allows editing of waypoints that have
already been set. To edit a waypoint:
From this menu you can register, edit, and delete an
area to be avoided while planning a route. These areas
can also be saved so the system can automatically
avoid them when planning a route.
1. Touch Edit Waypoint.
2. Touch the MAP key to view the destination location
on the map screen.
3. Touch CHANGE ORDER to change the order of the
waypoints and the final destination.
The map scroll can be used to change a waypoint
from one location to another.
Deleting a Waypoint
To delete a waypoint from the route:
1. Touch Delete Waypoint.
2. Select the waypoint to be deleted. A confirmation
window appears.
3. Touch YES to delete the waypoint or NO to return
to the previous menu.
To access the AVOID POINT/AREA menu:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering an Avoid Point/Area
Editing an Avoid Point/Area
To store an avoid point/area:
To edit an avoid point/area:
1. Touch Register Avoid Point/Area.
1. Touch Edit Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
points appear.
page 4-27.
2. Select the avoided point/area you want to change.
A map of the avoided area appears.
3. If desired, reduce or enlarge the area around the
point you want to avoid by using the REDUCE or
ENLARGE screen buttons.
3. Use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit the avoided
point.
If an avoid point cannot be avoided, the system
displays “Avoid Point and Area Stored. Route May
Not Avoid the Avoid Point and Areas.”
4. Touch Enter to set your new avoided area.
The system displays “Area Adjusted.”
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
Deleting an Avoid Point/Area
To delete an avoid point/area:
4. Touch Enter to set the area as an avoid point area.
When using the REDUCE or ENLARGE buttons, a
box appears to represent the area or an X appears
to represent the area avoided. When an avoid
point is set, the square will appear as green.
1. Touch Delete Avoid Point/Area. A list of avoided
points appear.
5. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
2. Select the avoided point/area to be deleted.
3. The system will ask to confirm the selection.
Touch Yes to delete the avoid point/area or
No to cancel.
If Yes is selected, the area will no longer be
avoided when traveling on a planned route.
4. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter a destination, choose from one of the
destination entry methods following in this section.
Enter Destination
The DESTINATION menu gives you several ways
to plan a route. Touch the Enter Destination screen
button from the PLAN ROUTE menu to display
the DESTINATION menu.
After entering a destination, If available, the system
displays up to three routes in a pop-up window indicating
the total mileage and time to destination for each
route. Select a route by touching NEXT. The map
displays each route in a different color. The selected
route highlights in red.
To start route guidance, touch Start or begin driving the
vehicle. Route guidance automatically begins after a
short distance.
If CHG ROUTE is touched before touching Start, route
preferences can be changed. See Route Preference
on page 4-36 for more information.
When a route has been planned, it highlights and a
bulls-eye symbol appears on the map to show the final
destination.
To cancel a route that has been set, see “Cancel
For destination entry methods listed on the second page
of the DESTINATION menu, touch the Next Page arrow.
Touch the Prev. Page arrow to return to the first page.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Touch the map screen continuously to scroll
through the map faster. The address of the location
on the map appears at the top of the screen.
Easy Planning Route
With this destination entry method, a destination can be
selected by using the scroll symbol on the map
If needed, use the zoom feature to locate the
destination. See “Map Scales” under Maps
on page 4-38 for more information.
4. Touch ENT DEST to set this location as the
destination. Touch MARK to also store this
location as a memory point.
5. Touch Enter to plan the route.
To use this destination entry method:
1. Press the MAP key.
2. Touch the map screen twice for the scroll symbol to
appear. Touch the map or drag the scroll symbol
toward the destination.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not include name extensions such as N. or Drive.
For example, the street name N. Civic Center Drive
should be entered as Civic Center. As information is
entered, the system automatically searches for
available names, and List becomes available.
Address
This destination entry method allows input of an
address by providing the system with a house number,
street name, and city. Select Street to begin entering
the desired address.
2. Touch List to view name choices or continue to
spell the street name to further reduce the number
of available items. Select a street name.
3. If the street name entered exists in more than one
city on the DVD database, a list of cities appear.
Select a city from the list, or enter the city name by
selecting City. While entering the city name, the
desired city can be selected from the list which
appears, or continue to spell the city name to further
reduce the number of available items.
4. Once the city name has been selected, enter the
house number using the numeric keypad.
The system lists the house number range that is
available for the street.
5. After entering all of the address information, touch
Enter to plan the route.
To use this destination entry method:
1. Enter the street name using the alpha keypad.
See “Alpha-Numeric Keypad” under Using the
information.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may search for a POI using the following three
methods:
All Points of Interest
This destination entry method allows you to choose a
destination from the point of interest (POI) list. Selecting
All Points Of Interest from the DESTINATION menu
brings up the alpha keypad. While inputting a POI or
city name, the List option will become available. As
information is entered, the system searches for available
POI and city names based on the information given.
The system supplies a list of names to make a selection
from when the choices are five or less.
• Touch NAME to type in a POI by name using the
alpha key pad. As you type in a name, the system
searches for an available match to your input.
Select the desired POI.
• Select a POI by touching CATEGORY. Use the
arrows to scroll through the categories listed.
Select a category along with any appropriate
sub-categories. If the list of available POIs for the
selected category is too long, the POI’s name or city
may need to be entered.
• Select CITY, then type in the city from which a POI is
selected. Choose a city from the list of cities that
appears. If the list of POIs for the selected city is too
long, enter the POI’s name or choose a category.
While entering a POI or city name, the List option
becomes available. Touch List to view the list of name
choices, or continue to spell the name to further
reduce the list of available items.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system lists all POIs available. Sort by name using
NAME SORT or touch DIST SORT to list POIs by
distance from the current location.
Memory Points
This destination entry method allows a memory point
to be set as the destination. Each time a destination
from the map screen is stored, the destination is stored
page 4-19 for more information.
Select a location from the list. The system shows the
selected POI on the map. If available, a pop-up window
displays. Touch INFO to view the POI’s name,
address, city, and phone number, if available.
Destinations must be stored as memory points to select
from PERSONAL, BUSINESS, ENTERTAINMENT,
or MARKED POINT. If you have renamed the memory
point category name(s), the name(s) appear as you
changed them.
Touch Enter to plan the route.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select a destination using this entry method:
1. Touch the Memory Points symbol.
2. Select a category.
To select a previous destination:
1. Touch the Previous Destination symbol.
2. Touch the screen button next to the desired
destination to select it.
3. Select a destination. Use the arrows to scroll
through the memory points. They can be sorted by
date, name, distance, and icon.
Use the arrows if necessary to view the entire list of
previous destinations.
3. Touch Enter to plan the route.
4. Touch Enter to plan the route.
Previous Starting Point
Previous Destination
This destination entry method allows selection of the
last start point as the destination. To select the previous
start point as the destination:
This destination entry method allows selection of a
destination by choosing from a list of the last
10 destinations entered into the system.
1. Touch Previous Destination.
2. Touch the Previous starting point screen button.
3. Touch Enter to plan the route.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home
Set by Map
This destination entry method allows selection of a
destination that has been previously stored as Home.
This destination entry method allows selection of a
destination by using the scroll symbol.
To choose Home as the destination:
1. Touch the Home symbol.
To use this feature:
1. Touch the Set By Map symbol. Current vehicle
position is shown on the map screen.
2. Touch Enter to plan the route.
2. Use the scroll symbol to select the desired
destination. The zoom in and zoom out feature can
be used to assist in finding the desired location.
3. Touch Enter to plan the route.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Touch List to view the list of available name choices
or continue to spell the name to further reduce the
list of available items. The system supplies a list of
names when the choice is five or less.
Freeway Entrance/Exit
This destination entry method allows selection of either
a freeway entrance or an exit as a destination.
If unsuccessful when inputting a name, the name
may need to be input differently, the map DVD
database may not contain this information, or the
name may be misspelled.
4. Select a freeway from the list.
5. The ENTRANCE or EXIT options will appear.
Choose ENTRANCE to select the entrance to
the freeway, or EXIT to select the exit ramp of the
freeway.
When either button is touched, it gives an
alphabetical list of freeway entrance and exit ramps
on the freeway that were entered. Touch DIST
SORT to sort the list by distance from the current
location, or NAME SORT to sort the list by name.
To enter a freeway name:
1. Touch the Freeway Entrance/Exit symbol.
6. Select the desired freeway entrance or exit from the
list. A map appears with the destination shown.
2. Enter the freeway name using the alpha key pad.
Freeways sometimes have a name and a number
associated with them which may need to be referred
to when entering freeway information. Freeways
are also referred to by their abbreviated names.
For example, Interstate 75 in the U.S. is selected
by entering I-75.
7. Touch Enter to plan the route.
While entering a freeway name, the List option
becomes available.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. To view a list of choices, touch List or continue to
spell the name to further reduce the list of available
items. The system will display a list of the
intersecting streets if the number of intersecting
streets is five or less.
Intersection
This destination entry method allows selection of a
destination by inputting the intersecting roads of
the destination.
4. Select the first street.
5. Now enter the second street name.
6. Select the second street name from the list of
intersecting streets. To view a list of choices,
touch List or continue to spell the name to further
reduce the list of available items. The system
displays a list of intersecting streets if the number
of intersecting streets is five or less.
If there are multiple intersections with the same
two roads, the system displays a list of cities
to choose from. Choose a city from this list.
A map with the intersections for that city appears.
7. Touch Enter to plan the route.
To enter an intersection:
1. Touch the Intersection symbol.
2. Using the alpha keypad, enter the name of the first
street in the intersection.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following options are available from the ROUTE
PREFERENCE menu:
Route Preference
To change the planning options:
Detour
This feature allows you to choose a distance in
miles/kilometers to detour. Select the detour distance
desired for residential roads and freeways.
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch Route Preference.
These settings are retained the next time Detour is used
until the settings are changed.
Alternate can also be touched to provide a new route
that does not use previously stored detour settings.
Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use Major Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best
route using only major roads unless a route cannot
be found without the use of a secondary road.
This selection will not always offer the shortest distance
or time to your destination.
Route Setting
This feature displays and changes the planning methods
used each time you plan a route. Planning method
options, allowing selection of the fastest route based on
time or distance, using only major roads, toll roads,
and using ferries based on the navigation system’s
information and information contained on the map DVD.
Use Toll Roads: Choose Yes to calculate the best route
using toll roads wherever possible. This selection will
not always offer the shortest distance or time to your
destination.
Use Ferries: Choose Yes to calculate the best route
using ferries when possible. This selection will not
always offer the shortest distance or time to your
destination.
Display Whole Route
This feature allows the entire planned route to be
displayed. Total mileage and time to destination
for the planned route displays on the map screen.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu.
Calculate Route
This feature allows route calculation for the selected
destination.
The following options are available from the ROUTE
SETTING menu:
Cancel Route
To cancel a planned route while traveling on it, touch
Cancel Route. The system will ask for confirmation by
touching YES. Touch YES to confirm cancellation of the
planned route or touch Return to keep the planned route.
Minimize Time/Distance: The system calculates the
fastest route or shortest route possible. Choose Time for
the fastest route or Dist for the shortest route.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maps
This section includes basic information needed to
understand the map database.
The maps are stored on a DVD-ROM. The 48 contiguous
United States and portions of Canada are contained on
two discs. To minimize the necessity of changing the
discs, both map discs cover US6, US7, and Canada.
East
West
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded.
Before shifting out of P (Park), make sure that the
DVD or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must
be shifted back into P (Park) to close the faceplate.
Installing the DVD Map Disc
Your dealer/retailer may have installed the map DVD.
If the map DVD was not installed, do the following
to load it:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. With the vehicle in P (Park), press and hold the
TILT key until a beep is heard. The system’s
faceplate opens.
Once the map DVD is inserted correctly, you will
have the following two choices:
• LANGUAGE
• I AGREE
3. If already loaded, the map DVD or a CD ejects from
the slot.
4. Load the map DVD into the slot by inserting it
partway. The system pulls it in.
The language can be changed at this time. See
page 4-52 for more information on choosing a language.
Once a language has been selected, touch I AGREE
to plan a route. The map appears showing the current
vehicle position.
5. Press and release the TILT key to close the
faceplate.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded. Before
shifting out of P (Park), make sure that the DVD or
CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must be
DVD Map Disc Messages
If an error appears on the display and/or the map disc
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• If the map disc was installed into the CD slot.
See “Installing the DVD Map Disc” previously.
shifted back into P (Park) to close the faceplate.
• It is very hot, when the temperature returns to
normal, the map disc should play.
Handling the DVD Map Disc
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the map disc should play.
When handling the DVD map disc, be careful of the
following:
• The map disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• Handle the disc very carefully to avoid
contamination or flaws. Signals may not read out
properly if the disc gets contaminated or flawed.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
• If the disc gets soiled, use a soft cloth to gently wipe
it out from the center of the disc to the outside.
Do not use photographic record cleaner, solvents,
or other cleaners.
Ejecting the DVD Map Disc
When the DVD map disc is not loaded, the navigation
portion of the system cannot be used.
• Do not use the disc to rest on while writing or
drawing using any writing utensil or attach a seal to
any of the sides or the disc.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. With the vehicle in P (Park), press and hold the
TILT key until a beep is heard. The system’s
faceplate opens.
• Do not keep the disc in direct sunlight, high
temperatures, or humidity.
• After using the disc, place it back into the
original case.
3. The map DVD ejects from the slot. Pull the
disc out.
4. Press and release the TILT key to close the
faceplate.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Search Area
To determine or change the system’s search area:
1. Press the ROUTE key.
2. Touch the Enter Destination screen button.
3. Touch Change under
the Search Area
heading. The system
displays a map
with each region
represented.
4. Select the desired region by touching the appropriate
screen button to the left of the U.S. map. The name
of the states or the country included in the selected
region displays at the bottom of the screen and the
region is highlighted.
5. Touch Enter to set the region as the search area.
6. Touch Return to go back to the previous screen.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Map Adjustments
Scrolling the Map
The system allows the adjustment of the scale of view
on the map. The map scrolls automatically based on the
direction being traveled.
Touch anywhere on the
map screen twice to
display the scroll symbol.
Map Scales
To view a larger or smaller
scale of the map, touch
the map scale arrows.
Place your finger on the map screen in any direction
outside of the scroll symbol to scroll in that direction.
The map continues to scroll until your finger is removed
from the screen.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), the system initially scrolls at
a slower rate. The rate increases while continuing to
touch the map screen.
If the vehicle is in motion, there is one scroll speed and
a limited distance to scroll. Keep touching the map
screen to scroll a longer distance.
If the vehicle icon becomes lost while scrolling, press
the MAP key to show the vehicle’s current location.
The scroll feature can be used to set a destination.
The scale of the map can also be adjusted by touching
the scale on the bar. The scale of a map can range
from 1/32 of a mile (0.05 km) to 128 miles (256 km).
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This type of symbol on
the map displays when
a waypoint has been
planned.
Symbols
The following symbols are the most common that
appear on a map screen.
The vehicle is shown as
this symbol. It indicates
the current position and
its heading direction on
the map.
The waypoint symbol is numbered from 1 through 5
depending on how many waypoints have been set.
on adding waypoints.
This symbol indicates
the distance to the final
destination.
This symbol appears on
the map to show the
destination after a route
has been planned.
on planning a route.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This symbol indicates the
distance and estimated
travel time to the final
This symbol indicates the
map with North up.
destination. The Estimated
Travel Time feature
must be on for estimated
travel time to be displayed.
While in North up mode, North is always be at the top
of the map screen regardless of which direction the
vehicle is traveling.
This symbol indicates the
map with the vehicle travel
direction up, or Heading up.
This symbol indicates
the distance to the
final destination in a
straight line.
The shaded triangle indicates North. While in Heading
up mode, the direction the vehicle is being travelled
will always be at the top of the map screen.
Touch either the North Up heading symbol or the
vehicle Heading Up symbol to alternate between
settings.
This symbol appears before route guidance begins or if
the vehicle is on a road where route guidance is not
available.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This symbol appears when
the navigation system is
unable to receive the
GPS signal.
This symbol indicates the
position of the next turn
instruction.
more information.
While on a planned route,
touch this symbol to display
the DEST MAP, WHOLE,
and TURN LIST options.
When a point of interest
(POI) or street address
name is too long to be
displayed, an arrow
appears.
Touch the right or left arrow to scroll through the
entire name.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With these options, the following can be done:
Whole: This option allows viewing of the entire planned
route. The distance to destination displays on the map
screen. Touch Return when finished.
Dest (Destination) Map: This option allows viewing of
the final destination location. The destination’s name
or address displays on the map screen. Touch Return
when finished.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The turn list reads from bottom to top. The bottom street
name is the street you are currently on. The system
automatically updates this screen as each turn is made.
Touch the scroll up and down arrows, providing scroll is
available. Touching the down arrow gives the current
location. Touching the up arrow gives upcoming streets.
At times, there may not be names available for entrance
or exit ramps.
To avoid a turn, touch AVOID next to the turn to be
avoided. Use REDUCE or ENLARGE to edit the avoided
point. Touch Reroute or press the MAP key to calculate
the new route.
Touch Return to view the current position and to turn
the turn list screen off.
Turn List: This option allows viewing of a step-by-step
listing of upcoming street names, the distance that you
will travel on the road, and turns needed to make during
the planned route.
Touch REROUTE or press the MAP key to calculate a
new route.
Auto Reroute
After touching Turn List, the system may take some time
to create the list. The length of time varies depending
on the length of the route and the planning methods
selected.
When the destination is set and you travel off of the
planned route, the system automatically begins to
reroute. The new route highlights on the screen.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If traveling in or to Canada and the regional border is
crossed, the only map scale views available are 4 mi,
8 mi, 31 mi, and 128 mi (8 km, 16 km, 64 km and
256 km). Change the selected search area region when
you get closer to the destination. See “Setting the Search
Traveling Across Regions
If driving across several states, the selected region
might have to be changed to represent the destination.
There are two ways to plan a destination when
traveling across regions.
The following method is suggested and provides the
most route guidance and map display functions:
Keyless Access System
1. Change the selected search area region as you get
closer to the destination. See “Setting the Search
When the engine is started, Driver 1 or Driver 2 displays
on the screen. A message will not appear on the
screen if the driver is unknown. The number on the back
of the transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or driver 2.
The navigation system can store memory points for
drivers 1 and 2 individually. See Keyless Access System
If not using the first method, keep the currently
selected search area region and enter the destination.
This method allows a destination selection from the
easy planning route method or from the All Points of
Interest (POI) categories with the “All Search Areas”
comment for US Only. For example, Tourist is a category
page 4-27 for more information.
OnStar® System
When using the OnStar® system, the audio system
mutes and the navigation voice prompts become
disabled during the call. The volume of the OnStar call
can be adjusted by using the steering wheel volume
more information.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system may not be available or interferences may
occur if any of the following is true:
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The navigation system determines the position of the
vehicle by using satellite signals, various vehicle signals,
and map data.
• Signals are obstructed by tall buildings, trees, large
trucks, or a tunnel.
• Objects are located on the rear shelf of the vehicle.
• Satellites are being repaired or improved.
At times, other interferences such as the satellite
condition, road configuration, the condition of the vehicle
and/or other circumstances can interfere with the
navigation system’s ability to determine the accurate
position of the vehicle.
• After-market glass tinting has been applied to the
vehicle’s rear windshield.
Notice: Do not apply after-market glass tinting to
the vehicle’s windows. Glass tinting interferes
with the system’s ability to receive GPS signals and
causes the system to malfunction. The window
might have to be replaced to correct the problem.
This would not be covered by the warranty.
The GPS shows the current position of the vehicle using
signals sent by the GPS Satellites of the United States
Department of Defense. When the vehicle is not
receiving signals from the satellites, a symbol appears
For more information if the GPS is not functioning
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot,
garage, or a lot with a roof.
Vehicle Positioning
At times, the position of the vehicle on the map may be
inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:
• The GPS signal is not received.
• A roof carrier is installed on the vehicle.
• The vehicle is being driven with tire chains.
• The tires are replaced.
• The road system has changed.
• The vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces such
as in sand, gravel, and/or snow.
• The vehicle is traveling on winding roads.
• The vehicle is on a long straight road.
• The tire pressure for the tires is incorrect.
• The tires are worn.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large
vehicle.
• The first time the map DVD is inserted.
• The battery is disconnected for several days.
• The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.
• The vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is
at low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and started
repeatedly.
• The vehicle has just been transferred by a vehicle
carrier or a ferry.
• The current position calibration is set incorrectly.
• The vehicle is traveling at high speed.
If problems are experienced with the navigation system,
page 4-12 to calibrate the system.
• The vehicle changes directions more than once, or
when the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a
parking lot.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a
regulation by time or season or any other regulation
which may be given.
Problems with Route Guidance
Inappropriate route guidance may occur under one or
more of the following conditions:
• Some routes may not be searched.
• You have not turned onto the road indicated.
• The route to the destination may not be shown if
there are new roads, if roads have recently
• Route guidance may not be available when using
automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn.
changed, or if certain roads are not listed on the
• The route may not be changed when using
automatic rerouting.
To recalibrate the vehicle’s position on the map, see
page 4-12 to calibrate the system.
• There is no route guidance when turning at an
intersection.
• Plural names of places may be announced
occasionally.
If the System Needs Service
If the navigation system needs service and the steps
listed here have been followed but there are still
problems, see your dealer/retailer for assistance.
• It may take a long time to operate automatic
rerouting during high-speed driving.
• Automatic rerouting may display a route returning to
the set waypoint if you are heading for a destination
without passing through a set waypoint.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ordering Map DVDs
Database Coverage Explanations
Coverage area depends upon the map detail available.
Some areas have greater map detail than others. The
navigation system works only as well as the information
page 4-52 on how to obtain updated map information.
The map DVD in the vehicle is the most up-to-date
information available when the vehicle was produced.
The map DVD is updated periodically, provided that the
map information has changed.
If there are any questions about the operation of the
navigation system or the update process, contact
the GM Nav Disc Center toll-free phone number,
1-877-NAV-DISC (1-877-628-3472) or go to the center’s
website, www.gmnavdisc.com.
Navigation Audio System
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to the
vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB
radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment
can be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment can interfere with the
operation of the vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. The vehicle’s
systems can interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
If you need any updates or a replacement disc, because
the current disc is lost, damaged, or needs to be updated,
call the GM Nav Disc Center or order a new disc online.
To order a disc, have your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) available. This helps the center make sure you
receive the correct and most up-to-date DVD map disc for
page 6-81 for more information.
After receiving the updated disc, replace the old disc in
the navigation system. See “Installing the DVD Map Disc”
page 4-38. Dispose of the old disc to avoid confusion
about which disc is the most current.
The vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
The audio system is operated using navigation system
menus. The audio menus are explained in this section.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Presets on the Map: With this feature on,
the audio system presets for the current audio source
displays on the left of the map screen. Touch ON to turn
this feature on. This feature can also be turned off.
Main Audio Menu
e / z (Audio/Adjust): Press this key to view the main
audio screen.
With this feature on, the preset radio stations can be
recalled from the map screen. Preset stations from
the map screen cannot be stored. This must be done
from the audio screen. See “Preset Station Menu” later
in this section for more information on storing presets.
Noise Compensation Technology: The system
is equipped with Bose® AudioPilot® noise compensation
technology. AudioPilot continuously adjusts the audio
system equalization to compensate for the background
noise, so the music sounds the same, even as the
background noise levels change.
To use AudioPilot®, press the ON screen button.
To turn it off, press the OFF screen button.
This feature is most effective at lower volume settings
where background noise can affect how well the music
being played through the vehicle’s audio system is heard.
At higher volume settings, where the music is much
louder than the background noise, there may be little or
no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
Preset Selection: The audio system’s presets can be
programmed to recall the home settings by touching
HOME. The presets used when traveling can also be
recalled to another area by touching AWAY. See “Preset
Station Menu” later in this section for more information on
how to store preset stations.
For more information on AudioPilot®, visit
bose.com/audiopilot.
The Home and Away feature is not available for the XM™
Satellite Radio source, if equipped.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clock Adjust Menu
8 (Clock): Touch this screen button to get to the
CLOCK ADJUST menu. See “Clock Adjust Menu” later
in this section for more information.
SCREEN ADJUST: To adjust the brightness or contrast
of the screen, touch SCREEN ADJUST to display the
screen adjust menu. See “Screen Adjust Menu” later in
this section for more information.
SOUND: Touch this screen button to access the Sound
menu. See “Sound Menu” later in this section for more
information.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): Touch this screen
button to access the DSP menu. See “Adjusting
the Speakers” later in this section for more information.
The following options are available from this menu:
HOUR/MIN.: Touch the up or down arrows to increase
or decrease the hour or minutes. Touch and hold
one of the arrows to advance the numbers quickly.
12H/24H: Touch 12H to set the clock in standard time
or 24H to set the clock in military time.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GPS TIME: The current GPS time displays to the right of
this screen button. Touch GPS TIME to set the navigation
system time to match current GPS time. If the seconds for
the present minute are greater than thirty when GPS
TIME is selected, the clock rounds up to the next minute.
Screen Adjust Menu
Daylight Saving Time: Touch this screen button to
increase the time setting by one hour. Then touch GPS
TIME to save the new setting. If the screen button is light
blue, the daylight savings time feature is on. If the button
is dark blue, the daylight savings time feature is off.
TIME ZONE: The selected time zone appears to the
right of this screen button. Touch this screen button to
toggle between time zones and select the desired
one. The time of the selected zone displays to the right
of the GPS TIME screen button. To set the clock to
the new setting, touch GPS TIME.
The following options are available from this menu:
If the system is not receiving GPS information, the time
can still be set manually as described above but the
GPS time and Daylight Saving Time features will not
be available.
K (Contrast): Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to
adjust the contrast of the screen. The screen changes.
Touch SET to confirm the setting.
! (Brightness): Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs
to adjust the brightness of the screen. The screen
changes. Touch SET to confirm the setting.
Touch Return to go back to the previous menu.
AUTO: This setting automatically adjusts the contrast
and brightness of the screen depending on exterior
lighting conditions.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DAY: This setting leaves the screen in day mode.
Day mode is best suited for daylight conditions.
BAND: Press this key to switch between AM, FM1,
FM2, XM1, XM 2, or WX, if equipped. While on a map
screen and this key is pressed, the screen will not
change but the audio source will.
NIGHT: This setting leaves the screen in night mode.
Night mode is best suited for nighttime conditions.
Finding a Station
SCREEN OFF: Touch SCREEN OFF to turn off the
screen. Press any hard key to turn the screen back on.
SET: Touch SET to save the choices and exit the
CLOCK ADJUST menu.
Language
The vehicle has been set for the English language.
Change the language, through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-57 for more information.
If the language is changed from English, a majority of the
voice guidance prompts and screen text changes to the
selected language. Remember, the menu screens will not
match word-for-word as they appear in this manual.
FM1 audio source shown, other sources similar
Playing the Radio
Press the BAND key to switch between AM, FM1, FM2,
XM1, XM2, or WX, if equipped. Touch the desired audio
source to select it.
PWR-VOL (Power-Volume): Press to turn the audio
and navigation systems on and off. Turn the knob
to increase or decrease the volume to the audio system.
«TUNE/SEEK ª: Press the up or down arrow to
go to the next or previous station and stay there.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN: To scan stations, touch SCAN. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next station. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
Preset Station Menu
Up to 36 stations, 6 AM, 6 FM 1, 6 FM 2, 6 XM 1,
6 XM 2, and 6 WX, if equipped, can be programmed for
home and for away. To store presets:
To scan preset stations, touch and hold SCAN for
two seconds. It only scans the audio source it is in, with
the exception of FM 1 and FM 2, which will both be
scanned if in that source. Touch SCAN again to stop
scanning.
1. Turn the audio system on.
2. Touch AM, FM, XM, or WX, if equipped, to display
the desired source. The preset station menu
appears.
RDS (Radio Data System): See “Radio Data System
(RDS)” later in this section for more information.
3. Tune to the desired station by using the
TUNE/SEEK arrows.
MSG (Message): See “Radio Data System (RDS)” later
in this section for more information.
4. Touch SOUND to set the bass, mid-range, treble,
and DSP for your preset, if desired. See “Sound
Menu” later in this section for more information.
AutoSet: Touch AutoSet to replace currently stored
preset stations with the strongest stations available in
the immediate area. Touch AutoSet again to return
to the original preset stations.
5. Touch and hold one of the six numbered preset
buttons for more than two seconds until a beep
is heard.
6. Repeat the steps for each preset and source.
SOUND: See “Sound Menu” following for more
information.
DSP: See “Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section
for more information.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Touch the F for front or R for rear to adjust the
fade of the speakers.
Sound Menu
4. Touch DSP to adjust the DSP, if equipped.
See “Adjusting the Speakers” later in this section for
more information.
After adjustments are made, touch any source screen
button. This takes you back to the preset station menu.
Whenever that screen button is touched, the previously
stored information that was entered for each preset
station is recalled.
To adjust the tone for each preset:
1. Press the BAND key.
2. Touch AM, FM1, FM2, XM1, XM2, or WX, if
equipped, to access the desired preset screen.
3. Touch SOUND.
T
source menu, or DSP menu to change the tone, DSP, if
equipped, fade, and balance for all sources. The audio
system has a separate setting for these features for each
source preset. However, the audio system keeps one
fade and one balance setting for all audio sources.
4. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
5. Touch Return to exit. This takes you to the preset
station menu.
6. Touch and hold one of the six preset screen buttons
for more than two seconds until a beep is heard.
To adjust sound settings:
Whenever that preset is touched for less than
two seconds, the station and previously stored
information that was entered for each preset station
is recalled.
1. Touch the plus (+) or minus (−) signs to adjust
treble, mid-range, and bass.
2. Touch the L for left or R for right to adjust the
balance of the speakers.
7. Repeat the steps for additional presets.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save DSP settings for the preset stations, use the
SOUND menu or touch DSP from the preset station
menu to access the DSP menu. See “Sound Menu”
listed previously in this section for more information.
Adjusting the Speakers
Touch DSP to change the following options:
ON/OFF: Touch to turn DSP on and off.
DRIVER SEAT: Touch to adjust the audio to give the
driver the best possible sound quality.
TALK: TALK makes spoken words sound very clear.
Touch this button when listening to non-musical material
such as news, talk shows, and sports broadcasts.
SPACIOUS: Touch to make the listening space seem
larger.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): The DSP feature
is used to provide a choice of four different listening
experiences. DSP can be used while listening to the
audio system or the CD player. The audio system can
store separate DSP settings for each source and preset
station, except WX, which is always set to TALK.
SOUND: Touch to access the Sound menu.
See “Sound Menu” listed previously in this section
for more information.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDS: Touch RDS to use alternate RDS functions
located in the preset menu. After touching RDS, there
is about five seconds to choose RDS ON/OFF, TA,
MSG, PTY, or SEL PTY. If no selection is made, the
system returns to the previous menu.
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
If tuned to a station broadcasting RDS information, the
station’s Program Service (PS) and Program Type (PTY)
will replace the station’s frequency on the status line
at the top of the display. After about five seconds, if
available, the PTY will be replaced on the display by the
station’s PTY name. The PTY and PTY name may be the
same or different.
If the audio system is tuned to a station that is not
broadcasting RDS information, the station’s frequency
remains on the display. While RDS is on, the audio
system searches for a stronger station in the network
if a station gets too weak for listening.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio can:
The RDS feature relies upon receiving specific
information from RDS stations. These features only
works when RDS information is available.
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
TA (Traffic): Touch TA to receive traffic announcements.
The audio system turns on the TA display. TA appears on
the display if the current station broadcasts traffic
announcements. Traffic announcements can also be
received from stations in the network related to the
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
current station. If the current station does not broadcast
traffic announcements, the audio system seeks to a
station which will. When the audio system finds a station
which broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop.
If no station is found, TA will turn off.
completed. Once the complete message has been
displayed, MSG disappears from the display until another
new message is received. MSG remains available
allowing the entire message to be displayed again.
PTY: PTY seeks only to stations with desired types of
programming. This button is used to turn on and off
Program Type (PTY) features.
While a traffic announcement plays, the audio system
uses TA volume. To increase TA volume, touch the VOL
button on the steering wheel or use the VOL up or down
buttons during the announcement. See “Voice Guidance
more information.
With RDS on, touch RDS, followed by PTY. The PTY
display turns on. Touch RDS followed by this button
again to turn the PTY display off.
Select PTY (Select Program Type): With RDS and
PTY on, touch RDS, then SEL PTY. The PTY menu
appears. Use the up and down arrows to select a PTY.
Touch the PTY selection and the system returns to
the screen with the preset stations shown. See Steps 1
through 7 under “Preset Station Menu” to store the
selected PTYs. The selected PTY is then stored on the
preset. Touch the PTY preset to recall your settings.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current radio
station or a related network station, it will be heard even
if the volume is muted or a CD is playing. If the audio
system tunes to a related network station for a traffic
announcement, it returns to the original station when the
announcement is finished. If the CD player was being
used, the CD will stay in the player and resume play at
the point where it stopped.
When the PTY display is on, press TUNE/SEEK
and SCAN to find radio stations of the PTY selected.
The last PTY selected is used for seek and scan modes.
If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND appears on the display. If both PTY and TA
are on, the audio system searches for stations with
traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
Touch RDS followed by TA again to turn TA off.
SG (Message): When RDS is on, if the current station
has a message, MSG displays. Touch MSG from the
preset menu to view the message. If the whole message
does not appear on the display, parts of the message
appears every three seconds until the message is
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PTY (Program Type) Presets: The six presets let you
return to favorite PTYs. These presets have factory
PTY preset stations. See “RDS Program Type (PTY)
Selections” later in this section. Up to 12 PTYs, 6 FM 1
and 6 FM2 can be set. To save a PTY preset:
ALERT: This type of announcement warns of national
or local emergencies. Alert announcements cannot
be turned off. Alert announcements come on even if
RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the display
when an alert announcement plays. The audio system
uses TA volume during these announcements.
1. Touch FM1 or FM2.
To increase volume, touch the VOL button on the
steering wheel or use the VOL up and down buttons
during the announcement. See “Voice Guidance Volume
information. When an alert announcement comes on the
tuned radio station or a related network station, it will
be heard even if the volume is muted or a CD is playing.
If the audio system tunes to a related network station
for an alert announcement, it returns to the original
station when the announcement is finished. If the CD
player is playing, the player stops for the announcement
and resume when the announcement is finished.
2. Touch RDS to enter the RDS menu.
3. Touch RDS ON/OFF to turn RDS on.
4. Touch PTY.
5. Touch SEL PTY and select the desired PTY from
the list.
6. Touch and hold one of the six presets for more
than two seconds until a beep is heard. Whenever
that numbered preset is touched for less than
two seconds, the PTY that was set, returns.
7. Repeat the steps for each preset.
Once a PTY is stored for each of the preset stations, a
PTY preset can be recalled by touching the preset station
for less than two seconds. Then use TUNE/SEEK or
SCAN to locate a station for that PTY selection.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFO (Information): Touch INFO while in XM™
mode to retrieve various pieces of information related
to the current song or channel. By touching INFO,
four different types of information can be retrieved: Artist,
Song Title, Channel, and Category. Additional
information may also be broadcast on that channel.
Additional Information messages may only be available
at certain times or on certain programs. If an Additional
Information message is being broadcast on the
tuned channel, INFO displays.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Each of the four information types may have multiple
pages of text. To reach a category, touch INFO
repeatedly until the desired type is displayed. If there
are multiple pages of text for the information selected
type, the radio automatically displays all the pages
for that type at a rate of about one page every
three seconds before timing out and returning to
the default display. This feature can be overridden
by touching INFO to review all of the pages at your
own pace.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During
your trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in
the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the
XM service.
For more information, contact XM at xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Setting Program Type (PTY) Preset
Stations
XL (Explicit Language Channels): XL on the radio
display, after the channel name, indicates content with
explicit language. These channels, or any others,
can be blocked at a customer’s request by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
S CATT (Category): Press the arrows to select a
category.
Once the desired category is displayed, press
TUNE/SEEK to select the category and go to the
category’s first station. To go to another station within
that category, press TUNE/SEEK once.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated and no action is required.
No XM signal: The vehicle is in a location that is
blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved
into an open area, the signal should return.
Touch and hold one of the desired P1-P6 presets to
store the selected station as a preset. If PTY times out
and is no longer on the display, start again.
Loading XM: The audio system is processing audio
and text data received. No action is needed.
SCAN: Use this button to scan through the channels
within a category or scan through the preset stations.
To scan through the channels in a category:
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service.
1. Select a category by using the category arrows.
2. Once the desired category is displayed, touch
SCAN. The radio begins scanning within the
chosen category.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with the XM™ subscription package.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned.
3. Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
To scan through preset stations, touch and hold SCAN.
Touch SCAN again to stop scanning.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available.
The system is working properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is available.
The system is working properly.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No CAT Info: No category information is available.
The system is working properly.
Six-Disc CD Changer
With the compact disc changer, up to six normal size
discs can be played continuously.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
When the radio is turned on, the changer begins
checking for discs. This continues for up to one and a
half minutes, depending on the number of discs loaded.
Noise might be heard, but this is normal. The CD
changer is initializing.
No Information: No text or informational messages
are available. The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver may have
previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Press the CD hard key to access the six-disc CD
changer screen. You can also use the system’s DVD
player for single CD play once the map DVD is removed.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
will alternate with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID
label. This label is needed to activate the service.
If no CD is loaded in the CD/DVD Player and the CD
hard key is pressed, the message “No CD Loaded”
displays.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receiver: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver may have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The numbered buttons (1 through 6) represent the order
of the discs loaded in the changer. If there are only
two CDs loaded, buttons 1 and 2 will only be available
to choose from.
LOAD: Touch once each time a CD is loaded into
the changer. It may take up to 10 seconds for the
changer to accept the CD into the slot depending on the
changer initializing. Repeat this procedure for loading
up to six discs. Press and hold the LOAD button until a
beep is heard to put the changer in LOAD ALL mode.
Once the Insert CD message is displayed, you can load
all six discs, one after the other.
r (Play): Touch to begin playing a CD.
CD Changer Screen
RANDOM DISC: Touch to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order on the disc selected. Press
the TUNE/SEEK hard key to randomly seek through
the tracks on this disc. Touch RANDOM DISC again to
turn off random play mode.
Once the CD changer screen is accessed, you can
select one of the numbered buttons to go from
one compact disc to another among those loaded in
the CD changer and use the arrows to rewind or
fast forward through the disc selected.
SCAN TRACKS: Touch to hear the first 10 seconds of
each track on the selected disc. Touch this button
again to stop scanning. The CD mutes while scanning.
The following features are also available from this
screen:
• LOAD
r (Rewind): Touch to rewind quickly through a
track selection.
• EJECT
• SCAN THE DISCS or SCAN THE TRACKS
• and RANDOM ALL or RANDOM DISC.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EJECT: Touch once to eject the chosen CD. The
chosen CD may be selected by first touching one of the
numbered buttons from 1 to 6. Repeat this procedure
for ejecting up to six discs from the changer. If the
EJECT button is pressed and held until a beep is heard,
the system begins to eject all of the discs from the
player. Once the CD is removed the next will come out
until they are all ejected.
Press the down arrow to seek to the previous selection
on the compact disc. If playing the first track of disc,
pressing the down arrow seeks to the last track on the
selected disc. The sound mutes while seeking.
RDS (Radio Data Systems): See “Radio Data Systems
(RDS)” listed previously for information on this button.
SOUND: See “Sound Menu (Tone, DSP, Fade and
Balance)” for information on this button.
j (Pause): Touch to pause CD play. Touch it again to
resume play or touch the play button.
DSP (Digital Signal Processing): See “Adjusting the
Speakers” listed previously for information on this button.
RANDOM ALL: Touch to hear the tracks on all of
the discs in the CD changer in random, rather than
sequential, order. Press the TUNE/SEEK hard key while
RANDOM ALL is on to randomly seek within that disc.
Touch RANDOM ALL again to turn off random mode.
CD Changer Errors
CDX ERROR could be displayed for the following:
• The road is too rough. The disc should play when
the road is smoother.
SCAN DISCS: Touch to hear the first 10 seconds of
first track on each disc. Touch this button again to stop
scanning. The CD mutes while scanning.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or not loaded label
side up.
[ (Forward): Touch to fast forward quickly through
a track selection.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer/retailer. If the
audio system displays an error number, write it down
and provide this information to your dealer/retailer when
reporting the error.
«TUNE SEEK ª: Press the up arrow on the
TUNE/SEEK switch to seek to the next selection on the
compact disc. If playing last track of disc, pressing
the up arrow seeks to the first track of the next disc.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If one is loaded, the navigation map DVD ejects
from the slot.
CD/DVD Player
The player that is used for the navigation map DVD can
also be used as a single music CD player or a video
DVD player.
4. Gently remove the navigation map DVD from the
slot and return it to its case.
5. Insert the music CD into the slot. The system pulls
the CD into the player.
CD Player
6. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the
faceplate.
To use the player as a single music CD player, the
navigation map DVD must be removed. While playing a
CD in the CD/DVD Player, the navigation system is
not available. The message “The disc installed is not a
map DVD” will appear on the display if any of the
navigation hard keys are pressed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded.
Before shifting out of P (Park), make sure that the
DVD or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must
be shifted back into P (Park) to close the faceplate.
To remove the navigation map DVD and load a
music CD:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Press the TILT hard key until you hear a beep.
This opens the faceplate of the system.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN TRACKS: Touch to hear the first 10 seconds of
each track on the disc. Touch this button again to
stop scanning. The CD will mute while scanning.
REPEAT TRACK: Touch to repeat the selected track.
r (Rewind): Touch to rewind quickly through a
track selection.
j (Pause): Touch to pause CD play. Touch it again to
resume play or touch the play button.
[ (Forward): Touch to fast forward quickly through
a track selection.
CD Player Screen
«TUNE SEEK ª: Touch the up arrow on the
TUNE/SEEK hard key to seek to the next selection on
the compact disc. If playing the last track of the disc,
touching the up arrow will seek to the first track of the
disc. Touch the down arrow to seek to the previous
selection on the compact disc. If playing the first track of
the disc, touching the down arrow seeks to the last
track of the disc. The sound mutes while seeking.
Once a music CD is loaded, the CD player menu appears
on the display. When using the system as a single CD
player, the CD hard key will alternate between the CD
player and the six-disc CD changer if CDs are loaded.
r (Play): Touch to begin playing a CD.
RANDOM: Touch to hear the tracks in random, rather
than sequential, order on the disc. Touch RANDOM
again to turn off random mode.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) with the system’s
faceplate open will cause the faceplate to close
automatically. This could cause damage to a
CD, DVD or the system if it is partially loaded.
Before shifting out of P (Park), make sure that the
DVD or CD is loaded properly. The vehicle must
be shifted back into P (Park) to close the faceplate.
DVD Player
To use the player as a video DVD player, first remove
the navigation map DVD or music CD. While playing
a video DVD, the navigation system is not available.
The message “The disc installed is not a map DVD”
appears on the display if any of the navigation hard keys
are pressed.
Once the faceplate is closed and a video DVD is
loaded, the system automatically plays the DVD.
This feature will not operate unless the vehicle is in
P (Park).
Playing a DVD
To remove the navigation map DVD and load a
video DVD:
There are two ways to play a DVD depending on which
screen is displayed:
1. With the vehicle in P (Park) and the vehicle running,
press the TILT hard key until a beep is heard.
The faceplate of the system will open.
• From a map screen, touch the DVD source button.
• From the audio screen, press the DVD hard key.
2. If a map DVD or a music CD is loaded, the system
automatically ejects it. Gently remove it from the
slot and return it to its case.
Once a DVD is inserted, the system automatically plays
the DVD.
3. Load the video DVD into the slot. The system pulls
the DVD into the player.
4. Press and release the TILT hard key to close the
faceplate.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIEWING ANGLE: Touch to adjust the viewing angle of
the DVD. Some DVDs allow you to change the camera
angle. This may not be available on all DVDs.
Depending on the type of DVD being used, this button
may or may not be available.
DVD Menu Options
To display the menu choices while a DVD is playing,
touch anywhere on the screen and the menu appears.
SUBTITLE: Touch to playback the video with subtitles.
This may not be available on all DVDs. Depending
on the type of DVD being used, this button may or may
not be available.
SCREEN ADJUST: Touch to adjust the brightness,
contrast and red/green color adjustments.
CURSOR: Touch to access the left/right and up/down
cursors on the screen. The cursors allow menu
options to be navigated on the screen.
MENU: Touch to access the DVDs menu options.
Depending on the type of DVD being used, this button
may or may not be available. Touch the button
labeled one, two or blank to change the image size
displayed on the screen.
IMAGE: Touch to either start playing a DVD or to
remove the DVD menu screen.
AUDIO PROGRAM: Touch to change the audio
language heard.
TITLE: Touch this button to display the title of the DVD.
Depending on the type of DVD being used, this button
may or may not be available.
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Under LANGUAGE PREFERENCES, you can select
different languages for AUDIO, SUBTITLE and
DVD MENUS.
1. To change languages, first select the option to be
changed.
2. Select a language from the list given.
3. Touch RETURN to end out the menu. The selected
language is now saved.
Under PARENTAL LOCK, select SET RATING LIMIT
and SET PIN.
To SET RATING, first touch the button. Then, make
the selection. Touch RETURN to end out the menu.
The selection is now saved.
If TITLE is available, this button allows navigation
through chapters or the DVD features. Once the
appropriate title or track has been selected, press the
Return button then the IMAGE button on the DVD menu
to view the movie in full screen.
To use PARENTAL LOCK, first touch the button. Then,
enter a four-digit numeric password. Touch RETURN
to end out the menu.
SEARCH: Touch to search to a certain scene on
the DVD. Depending on the type of DVD being used,
this button may or may not be available.
SETTING: Touch to adjust the following:
• LANGUAGE PREFERENCES
• PARENTAL LOCK
r (Rewind): Touch to rewind through a scene during
playback.
r (Resume): Touch to resume playing a DVD.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The audio system can store HOME and AWAY preset
stations. HOME and AWAY preset stations allow use of
one set of preset radio settings in the area where you
live, and another set when you go out of town. That way,
there is no need to reprogram the preset stations
every time you travel.
c (Stop): Touch to stop the DVD.
j (Pause): Touch to pause the DVD.
[ (Forward): Touch to advance rapidly during
playback.
To select HOME and AWAY preset stations:
L (Frame Advance): Touch to advance by chapter
during playback.
1. With the audio system on, touch the Audio hard key
and turn the audio system off.
2. Touch the HOME or AWAY button from the main
audio screen.
Radio Personalization with Home
and Away Feature
The next time the audio system is turned on, the
system recalls the last active preset selection.
With this feature, the latest audio system settings can be
recalled that were adjusted the last time the vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to store
and recall their own audio system settings. The settings
recalled by the audio system are determined by which
transmitter (1 or 2) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number on the back of the transmitter corresponds
to driver 1 or to driver 2. The audio system settings will
automatically adjust to where they were last set by the
identified driver. The settings can also be recalled by
briefly pressing the MEMORY seat switches 1 or 2
located on the driver door.
When battery power is removed and later applied, the
home audio system preset stations do not have to
be reset because the audio system remembers them.
However, the away radio preset stations have to
be reset.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Clearly state one of the commands listed on the
following pages. For example, say “FM1”.
Voice Recognition
The navigation system’s voice recognition allows for
hands-free operation of navigation and audio system
features. Voice recognition can be used when the
ignition is on or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active.
3. The system states the command being implemented.
For example, the system says “FM1 Radio” and
change the audio system to the FM1 source.
The voice recognition can be ended by not speaking
any commands. After about five seconds of silence, the
system automatically cancels voice recognition.
This feature only works if the map DVD is inserted and
I AGREE has been selected. If voice recognition is used
without the map DVD inserted, the system displays
“Please insert the navigation map DVD to use the voice
recognition feature.” See “Installing the DVD Map Disc”
At times, the system may not understand a spoken
command. If this happens, try saying the command
again. If a spoken command is not available, the system
provides feedback based on availability.
While using voice recognition, make sure to keep
interior noise levels to a minimum. Otherwise, the
system might not recognize voice commands.
To use navigation voice recognition:
1. Push and hold the talk
symbol steering wheel
control until a beep is
heard. The audio
The system only recognizes commands spoken in
English.
system mutes.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Commands
Voice Recognition Commands
Radio: Changes the audio system to the next radio
audio source.
The following list shows all of the voice commands
available for the navigation system with a brief
description of each. To use the voice commands,
refer to the instructions listed previously.
AM: Changes the audio system to the AM audio
source.
Help Commands
FM1: Changes the audio system to the FM1 audio
These commands are universal and will enable use of
the help prompts available from the system.
source.
FM2: Changes the audio system to the FM2 audio
Map Help: Provides the available commands for the
source.
map screen.
XM1: Changes the audio system to the XM1 audio
Destination Help: Provides the available commands
source.
for entering a destination.
XM2: Changes the audio system to the XM2 audio
Guidance Help: Provides the available commands for
source.
the guidance method.
CD Changer: Changes the audio system to the CD
Radio Help: Provides the available commands for
changer audio source.
the radio.
WX, Weather Band: Changes the audio system to the
Disc Help: Provides the available commands for the
weather band audio source.
CD changer.
Power On, Audio On: Turns the system’s power on.
Power Off, Audio Off: Turns the system’s power off.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seek Up: Causes the selected audio source to seek up
to the next strongest signal.
Position Commands
Current Position, Current Location, Show Current
Position, Show Current Location: Displays the
vehicle’s current location on the map screen.
Seek Down: Causes the selected audio source to seek
down to the next strongest signal.
Stop Scan: Causes the audio source to stop scanning
for the next strongest signal.
Map: Displays the map screen.
Map Commands
CD Changer Commands
Zoom In: Zooms in when on the map screen.
Zoom Out: Zooms out when on the map screen.
Track Up: Causes the CD changer to skip up to the
next track.
Maximum Scale: Zooms out to the maximum available
map scale when on the map screen.
Previous Track, Track Down: Causes the CD changer
to go to the previous track.
Minimum Scale: Zooms in to the minimum available
map scale when on the map screen.
Screen Commands
Screen Day Mode, Day Mode On: Adjusts the
system’s screen setting to the day mode.
Heading Up, Change to Heading Up: Displays the
Vehicle Up heading when on the map screen. The map
scale should be set for under 2 miles (4 km).
Screen Night Mode, Night Mode On: Adjusts the
system’s screen setting to the night mode.
North Up, Change to North Up: Displays the North Up
heading when on the map screen if the map scale is
set to 2 miles (4 km) or less.
Screen Auto Mode, Auto Mode On: Adjusts the
system’s screen setting to auto mode.
Screen Off: Turns the system’s screen display off.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Map Direction, Change Map Direction: Changes the
vehicle’s direction from North Up to Heading Up or
Heading Up to North Up on the map screen if the map
scale is set to 2 miles (4 km) or less.
Voice Guidance On: Turns on the navigation voice
prompts if a destination has been set.
Open Guidance, Open Guidance Screen, Open
Guide, Open Guide Screen: Opens the Guidance
Appearance menu if a destination has been set.
Mark, Mark This Point: Marks the location as a
memory point while on the map screen.
Close Guidance, Close Guidance Screen, Close
Guide, Close Guide Screen: Closes the Guidance
Appearance menu if a destination has been set.
Destination Commands
Home, Go Home: Enters the Home destination, if one
is set.
Arrow Guidance, Arrow Guide, Change To Arrow
Guidance, Change To Arrow Guide: Changes to
Arrow Guidance screen view in the Guidance Menu if a
destination has been set.
Go To Starting Point, Previous Starting Point: Enters
the last available starting point as a destination.
Turn List Guidance, Turn List Guide, Change to
Turn List Guidance, Change to Turn List Guide:
Changes to Turn List Guidance screen view in the
Guidance Menu if a destination has been set.
Guidance Commands
Repeat Guidance, Repeat Voice: Repeats the last
available voice prompt guidance command if a
destination has been set.
Entire Route, Entire Route Map, Route Overview:
Louder: Increases the volume of the navigation voice
Displays the entire route if a destination has been set.
prompts if a destination has been set.
Reroute: Generates an alternate route to a set
Softer: Decreases the volume of the navigation voice
destination while on a planned route.
prompts if a destination has been set.
Detour, Detour Entire Route: Activates the detour
Voice Guidance Off: Turns off the navigation voice
feature when driving a planned route.
prompts if a destination has been set.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delete Destination, Cancel Destination: Cancels a
destination if one has been set.
Point of Interest (POI) Commands
The following commands cause the system to display
icons if they are available on the map screen when the
map scale is set to a half mile (eight-tenths km) or less.
Next Waypoint Map: Displays the map view of the
next waypoint location if one has been set.
Restaurant, I’m Hungry: Displays restaurant POI icons.
First Waypoint Map: Displays the map view of the first
waypoint location if one has been set.
American Restaurant, American Food: Displays
American restaurant POI icons.
Second Waypoint Map: Displays the map view of the
second waypoint location if more than one waypoint
has been set.
Chinese Restaurant, Chinese Food: Displays Chinese
restaurant POI icons.
Third Waypoint Map: Displays the map view of the
third waypoint location if more than two waypoints have
been set.
Continental Restaurant, Continental Food: Displays
Continental restaurant POI icons.
French Restaurant, French Food: Displays French
restaurant POI icons.
Fourth Waypoint Map: Displays the map view of the
fourth waypoint location if more than three waypoints
have been set.
Italian Restaurant, Italian Food: Displays Italian
restaurant POI icons.
Fifth Waypoint Map: Displays the map view of the
fifth waypoint location if more than four waypoints have
been set.
Japanese Restaurant, Japanese Food: Displays
Japanese restaurant POI icons.
Destination Map: Displays the map view of the final
destination location if one has been set.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mexican Restaurant, Mexican Food: Displays
Ski Resort, Skiing: Displays ski resort POI icons.
Mexican restaurant POI icons.
Amusement Park: Displays amusement park
Seafood Restaurant, Seafood: Displays Seafood
POI icons.
restaurant POI icons.
Sport Complex, Stadium: Displays sports complex
Other Restaurant, Other Food: Displays other types
POI icons.
of restaurant POI icons.
Casino: Displays casino POI icons.
Shopping, Shopping Mall: Displays mall POI icons.
Grocery Store: Displays grocery store POI icons.
Gas Station, Gas: Displays gas station POI icons.
Parking Garage: Displays parking garage POI icons.
Parking Lot: Displays parking lot POI icons.
Marina: Displays marina POI icons.
Tourist Attraction: Displays tourist attraction POI icons.
Winery: Displays winery POI icons.
City Hall: Displays city hall POI icons.
Police Station: Displays police station POI icons.
Library: Displays library POI icons.
Rental Car Agency: Displays rental car POI icons.
Automobile Club, Triple A: Displays auto club
POI icons.
Hospital: Displays hospital POI icons.
Park & Recreation, Parks & Recreation: Displays
parks and recreation POI icons.
Auto Service And Maintenance, Auto Service,
Maintenance: Displays auto service POI icons.
Civic Center, Community Center: Displays community
center POI icons.
Hotel: Displays hotel POI icons.
Golf Course: Displays golf course POI icons.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convention Center, Exhibition Center: Displays
convention center POI icons.
Historical Monument: Displays historical monument
POI icons.
Court House: Displays court house POI icons.
Train Station: Displays train station POI icons.
Airport: Displays airport POI icons.
Performing Arts: Displays performing arts POI icons.
Museum: Displays museum POI icons.
Bank: Displays bank POI icons.
Bus Station: Displays bus station POI icons.
School: Displays school POI icons.
ATM: Displays ATM POI icons.
Commuter Rail Station: Displays commuter rail station
POI icons.
Higher Education, University, College: Displays
Ferry Terminal: Displays ferry terminal POI icons.
Park & Ride: Displays park & ride POI icons.
Rest Area, Rest Stop: Displays rest area POI icons.
higher education POI icons.
Business Facility: Displays business facility POI icons.
City Center: Displays city center POI icons.
Tourist Information: Displays tourist information
POI icons.
POI Off: Turns off POIs so they do not appear on the
map screen.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
{ CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the
engine stops, you will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the
power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or
icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of
the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and
you might even notice that the brake pedal moves
a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock Brake
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hear
a motor or clicking noise and feel the brake pedal
move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help more than even
the very best braking.
The StabiliTrak System is a computer controlled system
that helps the driver maintain directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is accomplished
by selectively applying any one of the vehicle’s brakes.
Brake Assist
The Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
light is located on the
instrument panel.
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic
brake control module increases brake pressure at each
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this
time is normal and the driver should continue to
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal
pressure is quickly decreased.
STABILITRAK ACTIVE comes on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) when the system is working. See DIC
information. The system may be heard or felt while it is
working. This is normal.
The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes on the instrument panel,
a chime will sound, and SERVICE STABILITRAK comes
on the DIC if there is a problem with the system.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When this light and SERVICE STABILITRAK comes on,
the system is not operational and needs to be serviced.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
To turn the system off, press and hold the TCS/
StabiliTrak button until the light comes on the instrument
panel and STABILITRAK OFF comes on the DIC.
The system comes on automatically whenever the
vehicle is started. To help maintain directional control
of the vehicle, the system should always be left on.
The system can be turned off if needed. If the StabiliTrak
system is turned off, the Traction Control System will
also be turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The system can be turned back on at any time by
pressing the button. The TCS/StabiliTrak light turns off
and STABILITRAK ON briefly comes on the DIC.
If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system detects a flat
tire and FLAT TIRE comes on the DIC, or if the TPM
system is not working and SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
comes on the DIC, StabiliTrak can be affected in
the following ways:
The Traction Control
button is located on
the console.
• StabiliTrak cannot be turned off by the driver.
• If StabiliTrak is off, it will be turned on automatically.
• Performance Mode is unavailable — XLR-V only.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Mode — XLR-V Only
Traction Control System (TCS)
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Performance Mode is active, it is possible to lose
traction. If a shift is attempted with the rear wheels
spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible to
cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt to
shift when the rear wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional
information.
The vehicle has a traction control system that limits
wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the rear brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The TRAC SYSTEM ACTIVE message will display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction
control system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings
heard or felt while it is working, but this is normal.
For vehicles with this feature, the Performance Mode
can be selected by pressing the TCS/StabiliTrak button
on the console two times quickly. PERFORMANCE
MODE comes on the DIC. Performance Mode allows the
driver to have full control of the rear wheels while the
StabiliTrak System helps maintain directional control of
the vehicle by applying the brakes as necessary.
The TCS/StabiliTrak light will not be on. The TCS will
not be operating. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If cruise control is being used when the traction control
system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control
will automatically disengage. Cruise control may be
reengaged when road conditions allow. See Adaptive
page 3-11 for more information.
When the TCS/StabiliTrak button is pressed again, the
StabiliTrak and Traction Control Systems will be on.
The TRAC/STABILITRAK ON message will be displayed
briefly in the DIC and a chime will be heard.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This warning light comes
on if there is a problem
with the traction control
system.
To turn the system off,
press the traction control
button located on the
center console.
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
The TRACTION SYSTEM OFF message will display on
the DIC and the traction control system warning light will
come on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when the
button is pressed, the TRACTION SYSTEM OFF
message will display – but the system will not turn off right
away. It will wait until there is no longer a current need to
limit wheel spin.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, the system should
always be left on but can be turned off if needed. It may
be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.
page 5-20 for more information.
The system can be turned back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The TRACTION SYSTEM ON
message should display briefly on the Driver Information
for more information.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect the vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 6-3 for more information.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering System
Magnetic Ride Control™
With this feature, Magnetic Ride Control automatically
adjusts the ride of the vehicle based on driving
conditions. The controller receives input from the system
to determine the proper ride. If the controller detects
a problem within the system, the DIC will display a
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL message. See DIC
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel
when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease
when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and your speed. While in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like
a standard axle most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
If you need to reduce speed, do it before you enter the
curve, while the front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 76 to 127 mm,
(about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system
is off, then an acceleration skid is best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
(XLR-V)
• Do not drink and drive.
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, the engine may use more oil than
it would with normal use. Low oil levels can damage
the engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during
racing or other competitive driving and keep the level
at or near 2 quarts (2 L) above the upper mark that
shows the proper operating range on the engine oil
dipstick. For information on how to add oil, see
driving, remove excess oil so that the level on the
dipstick is not above the upper mark that shows the
proper operating range.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
Driving at Night
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect
your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower
in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving
through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing
water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
on page 6-46.
• Turn off cruise control.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but
slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
When driving through deep snow, turn off the traction
control system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
speeds.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches on the side
of the vehicle that is away from the wind to
bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide,
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a
rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be
towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out,
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar)
of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open,
you will find the label attached below the door
latch. This label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 6-54.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification Label” later in this section.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
to tow a trailer.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 1 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
400 lbs (181 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If the vehicle
must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in
this section.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if the disabled vehicle needs to be towed.
Towing a Trailer
The vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing the vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always put the vehicle on a flatbed truck.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6
Service and Appearance Care
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep
the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might
notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 4.4L V8 engine (VIN Code D),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. For best performance, use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 93. In an emergency, you can use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or higher.
If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any aggressive
driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle
applications. You might also hear audible spark knock
during acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel as
soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, the
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511
in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
for additional information.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the instructions on the
pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in
some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.
The fuel door release
button is located on the left
side of the instrument
panel. The button only
works when the vehicle is
in P (Park) or N (Neutral)
and the valet lockout button
is in OFF.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An alternate fuel door
release is located inside
the trunk behind a panel on
the driver side of the
vehicle. Pull the handle to
release the fuel door.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-50.
The CHECK GAS CAP message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will be displayed if the fuel cap is not
properly installed.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you. If
you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This
may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light
and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To lift the hood, use the following steps:
1. Pull the lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is under
the hood near the center of the vehicle. Move
the release lever to the right and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 6-87.
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
page 6-30.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-31.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 4.4L V8 XLR-V engine, here is what you will see:
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
If the LOW OIL LEVEL or LOW OIL PRESSURE
message on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
appears, check the engine oil level right away.
For more information, see LOW OIL LEVEL and
LOW OIL PRESSURE under DIC Warnings and
regularly; this is an added reminder.
on page 6-87.
page 6-30.
Checking Engine Oil
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 6-31.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
• GM4718M
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at
all temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM
Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil
change.
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If this vehicle is an XLR-V model, the engine
uses a special oil filter. The use of any other engine
oil filter could lead to filter failure and result in severe
engine damage. Damage caused by use of the wrong
engine oil filter would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM4718M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
necessary. A CHANGE OIL NOW message in the DIC
page 3-60. Change the oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you
are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained
service people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is
changed.
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System and the Oil Life Indicator
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL NOW
message in the DIC being turned on, reset the system.
After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE OIL NOW
message and the oil life indicator must be reset. To
reset the message:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
1. Press the up or down arrow to scroll the DIC to
show OIL LIFE.
2. Once the XXX% ENGINE OIL LIFE menu item is
highlighted, press and hold the RESET button until
the percentage shows 100%.
If the percentage does not return to 100% or if the
CHANGE OIL NOW message comes back on
when you start the vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the filters:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Some XLR-V vehicles, have a single piece black
cover that snaps over the entire air cleaner
the location of the engine air cleaner/filters.
assembly. For vehicles with this cover, simply pull it’s
left/right sides toward the outside of the vehicle and
lift up to remove cover. Reinstall the cover when you
are finished inspecting/replacing the filters.
Notice: If you spray water into the engine air
cleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine air
cleaner/filter housing, you could damage your
vehicle’s engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not spray water into the
engine air cleaner/filter intake and/or housing.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
Inspect the air cleaner/filters at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace them at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filters at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filters
2. For vehicles that do not have a single piece black
cover, move the clasps on the top of the engine air
cleaner/filter cover forward to unlatch the cover.
To inspect the air cleaner/filters, remove the filters from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filters to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filters remain caked with dirt, new
filters are required.
3. Lift the front of the cover at an angle and remove.
This is necessary due to the four tabs located on
the rear of the cover.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter and any loose
debris that might be found in the air cleaner base.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
5. Inspect or replace the filter.
6. Repeat the procedure for the second air
cleaner/filter.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the engine air
cleaner/filter.
{ CAUTION:
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, you should have this done at the dealer/retailer
service department. Contact your dealer/retailer for
additional information or the procedure can be found in
the service manual. To purchase a service manual,
page 8-15.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
sure to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{ CAUTION:
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with the engine overheating, see Engine
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
What to Use
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
{ CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or
above the FULL COLD mark on the side of the coolant
surge tank that faces the front. When the engine is hot,
the level could be higher than the FULL COLD mark.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
If the coolant is below the FULL COLD mark when the
engine is hot, there could be a leak in the cooling system.
If the LOW COOLANT message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) comes on and stays on, it means the
vehicle is low on engine coolant. See DIC Warnings and
indicated by a LOW COOLANT message on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). If it is, there could be a leak in
the cooling system.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
The engine coolant surge tank is located toward the
rear of the engine compartment on the driver side of the
vehicle. For more information on location, see Engine
{ CAUTION:
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and
it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{ CAUTION:
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap and remove it.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
until the level inside the coolant surge tank stabilizes
at the FULL COLD mark on the front of the coolant
surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the cap is
hand-tight and fully seated.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LOW COOLANT message does not appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) after two minutes, the
coolant is at the proper fill level. If a LOW COOLANT
message does appear, repeat Steps 1 through 3 then
reinstall the pressure cap, or see your dealer/retailer.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.
There is also an engine coolant temperature gage on
the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
There is a COOLANT OVER TEMP message or an
ENGINE HOT, STOP ENGINE message displayed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message,
can indicate a serious problem.
{ CAUTION:
If an engine overheat warning is displayed with no low
coolant message, but no steam can be seen or
heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
on page 6-29 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
This operating mode allows the vehicle to be driven to a
safe place in an emergency situation. If an overheated
engine condition exists and the DIC message ENGINE
HOT, STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. Driving extended miles (km) in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
page 7-11.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Adding Washer Fluid
The LOW WASHER FLUID message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid is low.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 6-12 for reservoir
location.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system. See
“Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7-4.
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Brake Fluid
{ CAUTION:
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be above the MIN mark on the
reservoir. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system
checked to see if there is a leak.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid from a sealed
page 7-11.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
{ CAUTION:
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes automatically adjust
for wear.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
page 2-18.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
All doors and the trunk must be closed before
reconnecting the battery. After reconnecting the battery,
press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter. Failure to follow this procedure could result
in the alarm sounding. Pressing unlock on the keyless
access transmitter will stop the alarm.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not
push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use
the jump starting procedure in this manual to start
your vehicle when the battery has run down.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6-12 for more information on location.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
{ CAUTION:
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−)
cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move. The
electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Perform “Power Window Initialize” steps under Power
power loss.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you
will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To add lubricant when the level is low, use
Dexron LS Gear Oil or equivalent meeting
GM Specification 9986115. To completely refill after
draining, add 4.7 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip
Differential Lubricant Additive (GM Part No. 1052358) or
equivalent. Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug
hole with the Synthetic Gear Lubricant.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
Headlamp Aiming
The high intensity discharge (HID) visual optical aiming
type headlamps have been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment. If the headlamps
need to be re-aimed, it is recommended to see your
dealer/retailer for service. However, it is possible to
re-aim the headlamps as described in the following
procedure.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
the driver seat.
• The tires should be properly inflated.
• Start the vehicle and rock it to level the suspension.
Headlamp aiming is done with the low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps are correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
Notice: To make sure the headlamps are aimed
properly, read all the instructions before beginning.
Failure to follow these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
The headlamp aiming
device is under the hood
near the headlamps.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or mud
attached to it.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
To properly prepare the vehicle for vertical headlamp
more information.
Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed
before making any adjustments to the vertical aim.
Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an
incorrect headlamp aim.
To adjust the vertical aim:
4. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
for more information.
2. Locate the aim dot on the inner projector lens of the
low-beam headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on each low-beam headlamp. Record this
distance.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard in front of the headlamp not
being aimed. This should allow only the beam of
light from the headlamp being aimed to be seen on
the flat surface.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm male hex.
8. Turn the vertical
aiming screw until the
headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal
tape line.
10. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
9. The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:
Bulb Replacement
It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Replacement
The windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)
system. If you ever have to get the windshield replaced,
get one that is designed for HUD or the HUD image
may look out of focus.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm
until you hear the release lever click into place.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
Low-Profile Tires (XLR-V)
If your vehicle has P235/45R19 or P255/40R19
size tires, they are classified as low-profile tires.
These tires are designed for very responsive driving
on wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile performance tires and
that they tend to wear faster.
See your dealer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage
can occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into a curb. The
vehicle warranty does not cover this type of
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation
pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Winter Tires (XLR-V)
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The example below shows a typical
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
page 6-64.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 6-54.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 5-21.
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Run-Flat Tires
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Your vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There is no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place to
store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires perform so well
without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire has lost pressure.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
{ CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on the
instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when
the low tire warning light is displayed. Drive
cautiously and check your tire pressures as soon
as you can.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the
slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire
will not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated
run-flat tire for 25 miles (40 km) or less and at speeds of
55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that
the tire can be repaired. The tire can operate effectively
with no air pressure for up to 100 miles (160 km) at
speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then
have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it
provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
Because you will not have this cushion when driving on
a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage
your wheel and require replacement of it.
replacement. To locate the nearest GM or run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Assistance. For phone
numbers and Roadside Service details see Roadside
{ CAUTION:
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than other
tires and could explode during improper service.
You or others could be injured or killed if you
attempt to repair, replace, dismount, or mount a
run-flat tire. Let only an authorized run-flat service
center repair, replace, dismount, and mount
run-flat tires.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have driven on
the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you have driven any distance on a run-flat
tire, check with an authorized run-flat tire service center
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should
be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat feature,
all replacement tires must be self-supporting tires. As
soon as possible, contact the nearest authorized GM or
run-flat servicing facility for inspection and repair or
The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
sensors contain batteries which are designed to last
for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your
dealer/retailer if you ever need to have a wheel
replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
• Reduced fuel economy
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
additional information.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS
sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly on your vehicle. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmits
the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the
vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light,
located in the instrument
panel cluster.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message appear at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your
for additional information.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was not done
or not completed successfully. The DIC message
should go off after successfully completing the
sensor matching process.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. Under these conditions the TPMS
malfunction light (low tire warning light) comes on,
and at the same time the DIC message is displayed.
The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS sensors are installed
and the sensor matching process is performed
successfully.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label, see Inflation - Tire
page 5-21. Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) need the TPMS sensors
reset after a tire rotation is performed. A special tool
is needed to reset the sensor identification codes.
See your dealer/retailer for service. Make certain
that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See
page 6-90.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.
for additional information.
If your vehicle has P235/50R18 size tires they
should be rotated any time you notice unusual
wear. Rotate the tires as soon as possible and
check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires
page 6-66.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
When rotating P235/50R18 size tires, always use
the correct rotation pattern shown here.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
XLR-V Tires
Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle
has P235/45R19 size tires on the front axle and
P255/40R19 size tires on the rear axle. Different
tire sizes front to rear should not be rotated.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
When It Is Time for New Tires
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires
can affect the braking and handling performance of your
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the
same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as
the original tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires
with a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s
maximum speed capability.
{ CAUTION:
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for
page 6-48, for additional information.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands or types, may also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand,
and type tires on all four wheels.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{ CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ WARNING:
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
CAUTION: (Continued)
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
{ CAUTION:
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
CAUTION: (Continued)
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure
to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts
Tighten the wheel lug nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of
the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might
come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing
a crash.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
Lifting the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage to
the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash. Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer recommends it for
use on the vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to the vehicle,
drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or others.
You and they could be badly injured. Find a level
place to lift the vehicle. To help prevent the
vehicle from moving:
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park).
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Put blocks in front of and behind the wheels.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Front
{ CAUTION:
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle or the vehicle
may fall and cause your or others injury.
If you ever use a jack to lift the vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging the vehicle.
Notice: Lifting the vehicle improperly can damage
the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. To lift the vehicle
properly, follow the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of the vehicle, behind the front tires.
• Make sure the jack you are using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your GM dealer and
the Cadillac XLR service manual.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Rear
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear of
the vehicle, on either the driver or passenger side.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain the tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
information.
This vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type of tire
can operate effectively with no air pressure, so you will
not need to stop on the side of the road to change a flat
tire. You can just keep on driving. The shorter the
distance you drive and the slower the speed, the greater
the chance that the run-flat tire will not have to be
replaced. Run-flat tires perform so well without any air
that a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) is used to alert you if
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center, the vehicle’s handling
capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose
control of the vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the
TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED HNDLG
message is displayed. Drive cautiously and check
the tire pressures as soon as you can.
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could be
injured and the vehicle could be damaged. Always
be sure the proper tools and procedures, as
described in the service manual, are used.
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in the
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not be
covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in the vehicle’s run-flat tires.
If the TPM system detects a tire pressure below
5 psi (34 kPa), the TIRE FLAT MAX SPD 55, REDUCED
HNDLG warning message is displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Operation and
on page 3-60 for information and details about the DIC
operation and displays.
To order a service manual, see Service Publications
If a tire goes flat, the stability control system will turn on
automatically even if it was disabled by the driver. When
a flat tire condition exists the Stabilitrak® system cannot
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Do not clean your vehicle using:
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
your interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage your vehicle’s interior.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of your leather and are not recommended.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior
because they can alter the appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish
on leather.
Wood Panels
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with
just water and mild soap.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not
be able to provide adequate protection. Clean
safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm
water.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you
could damage the vehicle. Verify with the manager
of the car wash that the vehicle will fit before
entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
your vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup
of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that
contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels,
you could damage the surface of the wheel(s).
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fiberglass Springs (Composite
Springs)
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaning
products, engine degreasers or aluminum cleaning
agents on fiberglass springs, you may damage
the springs. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only approved cleaners
when cleaning your vehicle’s fiberglass springs.
Chemical Paint Spotting
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
page 6-90 for your vehicle’s engine code.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the rear compartment cover in the
trunk. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily
borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out.
Replace the fuse as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The panel fuse block is located on the passenger side
of the vehicle, under the instrument panel and under the
toe-board.
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner
of the panel. Then turn the fuse block door knob
counterclockwise and pull the door to access the fuses.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
ACCA/DRIV
DR SW
AUX PWR
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Driver Door Switch
Auxiliary Power
BTSI SOL/COL Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
LOCK
Solenoid, Column Lock
Cigar Lighter
CIGAR LTR
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Instrument Panel Cluster, Heads-up
Display (HUD)
IGN SW/INTR
SNSR
CLSTR/HUD
Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor
COLUMN LK
MDL
INTERIOR
LIGHTS
Not Used
Interior Lights
DECK LID
CLOSE/PRK/
BRK B
DR LOCKS
ECM
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
EMPTY
FOLDING
Inside Rearview Mirror, Climate
Trunk Close Button, Parking Brake
Solenoid B
ISRVM/HVAC Control System, Column Lock,
Power Sounder
ONSTAR
PRK/BRK
SOL A
PWR FLDG
MIR-EXT/RET
PWR LUMBAR
LH/RH
RADIO/S-BAND/
VICS
REAR
FOG/ALDL
REVERSE
LAMP
REVERSE
LAMPS
RPA/H/C
SEAT/WPR
RELAYS
RUN/ACSRY
PWR
Door Locks
Engine Control Module
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
OnStar®
Parking Brake Solenoid A
Power Folding Mirror
Power Lumbar
Not Used
Not Used
Radio, S-Band, CD Changer
TOP/TRUNK Retractable Hardtop, Trunk Latch
LATCH
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller
Rear Fog Lamps, Diagnostic Link
Connector
Reverse Lamp
Reverse Lamps
GMLAN
GMLAN Devices
DEVICES
HTD STR WHL Heated Steering Wheel
HTD/SEAT LH Driver Side Heated Seat
HTD/SEAT RH Passenger Side Heated Seat
HVAC/PWR
SND
Rear Park Aid, Heated/Cooled
Seats, Windshield Wiper Relays
Climate Control System, Power
Sounder
Run, Accessory Power
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
Park Brake Hold
RUN/CRANK Starter/Crank
SDM/PSIR SW Airbags
PRK/BRK
HOLD
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse
HOLDER
SPARE FUSE
Spare Fuse
HOLDER
PRK/BRK
RELEASE
Park Brake Release
F/MIR
RETRACT
Not Used
Not Used
FOG RR
F/MIR EXTEND Not Used
STOP LAMP Stoplamp
FUEL DR
Fuel Door
STR WHL
DIMMING
Steering Wheel Control Button
Lights
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Power Tilt Wheel, Telescopic
Steering Column, Memory Seat,
Driver Seat Switch, Retractable
Hardtop Switch
TILT/TELE
SW/MEM SEAT
MOD/TOP SW
PWR SEAT
Power Seats
DR CNTRLS Door Controls
TUTD
SW/STRG
COL SW
Tap-Up/Tap-Down Switch
WPR DWELL Rainsense™
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block
is located next to the
engine on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
For more information on
location, see Engine
page 6-12.
Fuses
Usage
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Antilock Brake System, Electronic
Suspension Control, Adaptive
Forward Lighting System (AFS)
1
To access the fuses, push in the tab located at the end
of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover open.
2
3
Horn
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),
Transmission Controls
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
4
Usage
Windshield Wipers
Fuses
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
48
Usage
Right Low Beam Headlamp
Not Used
5
Stop/Back-Up Lamps
Oxygen Sensor
6
Left Low Beam Headlamp
Fog Lamp
7
Battery 5
8
Parking Lamps
Right High Beam Headlamp
Left High Beam Headlamp
Cooling Fan
9
Electronic Throttle Control
Fuel Pump
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Antilock Brake System
Odd Injectors
Battery 3
Antilock Brakes
Climate Controls
Battery 2
Electronic Suspension Control
Emission Controls
Air Conditioning Compressor
Even Injectors
Starter
Audio Amplifier
Not Used
Windshield Washer, Adaptive
Forward Lighting System (AFS),
Intercooler Pump
17
18
Battery 1
Spare
Headlamp Washer
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
49
Usage
Relays
40
Usage
Rear Window Defogger
Windshield Wiper High/Low
Wiper RUN/ACCESSORY Power
Starter/Crank
Spare
50
Spare
41
51
Spare
42
52
Spare
43
53
Not Used
Fuse Puller
44
Ignition 1
54
45
Windshield Wiper On/Off
Headlamp Washer
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
46
56
47
Low Beam Headlamps
Fuel Pump
55
Relays
34
Usage
Horn
Diodes
§
Usage
35
Air Conditioning Compressor
Windshield Washer
Parking Lamps
Diode 1
36
Wiper Diode
Diode 2
§
37
38
Fog Lamps
§
39
High Beam Headlamps
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
12.6 qt
2.4 qt
12.0 L
2.3 L
Cooling System — Intercooler
Engine Oil with Filter – 4.4L V8 and 4.6L V8 Engines
Fuel Tank
8.0 qt
7.6 L
18.0 gal
68.0 L
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Replacement)
6-Speed Automatic
6.5 qt
6.2 L
Wheel Nut Torque
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.040 in (1.02 mm)
0.050 in (1.27 mm)
4.4L V8
4.6L V8
D
A
Automatic
XLR-V Engine Data
Engine
4.4L V8 (V-Series)
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
443 hp (330 kW) @
6400 rpm
414 lb ft (561 Nm) @
3900 rpm
4.4L
9.0:1
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
{ CAUTION:
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
To purchase service information, see Service
on page 6-5.
should be checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good
condition.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7-13. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE OIL NOW message displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), service is required for
the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of this
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service be
performed when you notice unusual wear. Check tires for
If tire rotation is recommended for the vehicle, rotate tires.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL NOW message appears, the
following services, checks, and inspections are required:
❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
levels. If the vehicle has the 4.4L V8 supercharged
engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as
needed.
❑ Perform any needed additional services. See
“Additional Required Services” in this section.
❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
See footnote (a).
❑ Inspect suspension and steering components.
See footnote (n).
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
See footnote (h).
❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (m).
❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (b).
on page 6-46. If tire rotation is recommended for the
vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 6-60.
❑ Inspect restraint system components.
See footnote (c).
❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (d).
❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (l).
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace passenger compartment air
filter. See footnote (e).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (f).
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (g).
•
4.4L Supercharged Engine: Intercooler
system service (or every five years,
whichever occurs first). See footnote (k).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (j).
(c) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed
safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(b) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 6-45 and Windshield and Wiper Blades
on page 6-78 for more information.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Lubricate the trunk key lock cylinder. Lubricate all
body door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches,
including those for the hood, trunk, console door, and
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(j) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(k) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This
service can be complex; you should have your dealer/
page 6-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean pressure
cap and filler neck. Pressure test the system and
pressure cap.
(e) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(l) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
(m) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(g) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(n) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. XLR-V Only: Lubricate the outer ends of both rear
toe-links every other oil change.
(h) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 6-23.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(4.4L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Check
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - Tire
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
{ CAUTION:
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
Engine Oil
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Trunk Key Lock
Cylinder
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
page 6-23.
DEXRON® LS Gear Oil
Intercooler
System
(4.4L V8
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862624,
in Canada 88862625) meeting
GM Specification 9986290.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Supercharged Coolant.
engine)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
System
Windshield
Washer
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Power Steering
System
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
Chassis Lubricant
XLR-V: Chassis
Lubrication
(Rear Toe-Link
Outer Ends)
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Elements
4.4 L V8 Engine
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
10342024
19166106
A2945C
A1208C
4.6 L V8 Engine
Engine Oil Filter
4.4 L V8 Engine
89017527
89017342
25917369
PF26
PF61
4.6 L V8 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF139
4.4 L V8 Engine
12592619
12571535
41-991
41-987
4.6 L V8 Engine
Wiper Blades
Driver Side
88987071
88987072
—
—
Passenger Side
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 7-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 7-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is
why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to the
Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following address.
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after the following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limited
wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may
include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
Dealers or Retailers.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining your
vehicle.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
• My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
Refer to MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within gmcanada.com.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
www.gmcanada.com
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-888-446-2000
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Overseas — Customer Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
www.Cadillac.com
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Service
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and
cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement
of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or
the same type of claim is made many times.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure,
incidental expenses may be reimbursed during
the 5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain
warranty period. Items considered are hotel,
meals, and rental car.
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an
auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a
Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts
and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
per year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and
a copy of the repair orders are required. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty in
both the U.S. and Canada.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the
maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. If
you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see your
dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the
allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local,
and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements
vary and may include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your
vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians
and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer or
a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
Service Manuals
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a
crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to
help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 8-2
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power ............................... 2-25
Seats (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Washer, Headlamps ........................................ 3-11
Windshield (cont.)
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|